95-8533-15 1 - (Eqp)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 153

Instructions

Eagle Quantum Premier ®


Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System

15.1 Rev: 12/13 95-8533


Table of Contents
Section 1 - Safety Section 3 - Installation
Alert Messages...............................................................1-1 Safety system Design Requirements..................... 3-1
Identifying the Area of Protection................................... 3-1
Identifying Wiring, Network (LON), and System Power
Section 2 - Introduction
Requirements......................................................... 3-1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION....................................................... 2-1 General Wiring Requirements................................ 3-1
Communications Loop................................................... 2-1 Power Wiring........................................................... 3-1
LON Communication Heartbeat..................................... 2-2 System Wiring (ATEX and IECEx).......................... 3-1
Theory of Operation....................................................... 2-2 Determining Power Requirements.......................... 3-3
Controller Logs............................................................... 2-4 EQ211xPS, EQ213xPS and EQ217xPS Power
Controller User Logic..................................................... 2-4 Supplies.......................................................... 3-5

Communication Network Fault Operation...................... 2-4 Backup Battery....................................................... 3-5

Multiple Wiring Faults..................................................... 2-5 Battery Charger...................................................... 3-5


EQP21x0PS(–X) Power Supplies........................... 3-6
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.............................. 2-5
EQP2410PS(–P) Converter.................................... 3-6
System Controller........................................................... 2-5 Determining Power Requirements.......................... 3-7
Local Operating Network (LON)..................................... 2-7 Shield Grounding.................................................... 3-8
Network Extenders................................................. 2-7 Junction Box Grounding......................................... 3-8
EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and Response Time vs. System Size............................. 3-8
EQ2100PSM Power Supply Monitor....................... 2-7
Moisture Damage Protection.................................. 3-8
EQP21xxPS(–X) Power Supplies and
Electrostatic Discharge........................................... 3-8
EQP2410PS(–P) Converter............................................2-7
EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor.......................................2-8 ground fault monitor (GFM) installation............ 3-8
Field Devices.................................................................. 2-8 Mounting................................................................. 3-8
Flame Detectors..................................................... 2-8 Wiring..................................................................... 3-8
EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete I/O Module........ 2-8
Network and Network Extender Installation.......3-9
EQ3700 8 Channel DCIO Module.......................... 2-9
Mounting................................................................. 3-9
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module.......................... 2-9
Wiring..................................................................... 3-9
EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module........................ 2-10
EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke & Heat Module... 2-10 Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) Installation..........3-11
EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module.....................2-11 EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit........................ 3-11
EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module..................... 2-12 Mounting................................................................3-11
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit.......... 2-12 Wiring....................................................................3-11
EQ22xxDCU / EQ22xxDCUEX Digital EQ22xxIDCGF Series Initiating Device Circuit Ground
Communication Units.................................... 2-13 Fault...................................................................... 3-12
PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse................................. 2-13 Mounting............................................................... 3-12
OPECL Open Path Eclipse................................... 2-13 Wiring................................................................... 3-12
UD10 DCU Emulator............................................ 2-13 EQ22xxIDCSC Series Initiating Device Circuit Short
Circuit................................................................... 3-13
Mounting............................................................... 3-13
Wiring................................................................... 3-13
Table of Contents – Continued
EQ3XXX Controller Installation........................... 3-14 8 channel relay module installation.................. 3-42
Enclosure Requirements.............................................. 3-14 Mounting...................................................................... 3-42
Mounting...................................................................... 3-14 Wiring........................................................................... 3-42
Serial Interface Board.................................................. 3-14 Configuration................................................................ 3-43
Ethernet Interface Board.............................................. 3-14
analog input module installation........................ 3-44
Wiring........................................................................... 3-15
Mounting...................................................................... 3-44
Power Wiring......................................................... 3-15
Wiring........................................................................... 3-44
Electrical Connections.......................................... 3-15
Configuration................................................................ 3-45
Controller to Controller Communication....................... 3-21
Configuration................................................................ 3-25 Gas Detector Location and Installation...................3-46
Software Defined Addresses................................ 3-25 Environments and Substances that Affect Gas Detector
Performance......................................................... 3-46
EQ3XXX Redundant controller installation.... 3-26
EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit used with
Enclosure Requirements.............................................. 3-26 Det‑Tronics H2S/O2 Sensors or other Two-Wire
Mounting...................................................................... 3-26 4‑20 mA Devices.................................................. 3-47
Wiring........................................................................... 3-26 Assembly and Wiring Procedure........................... 3-47
LON Wiring................................................................... 3-26 Sensor Separation for DCU with H2S and O2
Sensors......................................................... 3-48
High Speed Serial Link (HSSL).................................... 3-26
EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit used with
Configuration................................................................ 3-26
PointWatch/DuctWatch......................................... 3-49
S3 Configuration................................................... 3-26
Assembly and Wiring Procedure........................... 3-49
Controller Addresses............................................ 3-26
Sensor Separation for DCU with PointWatch....... 3-49
Modbus................................................................. 3-26
EQ22xxdcuex Digital Communication Unit (used with
ControlNet............................................................ 3-27 Det-Tronics Combustible Gas Sensors)................ 3-50
Ethernet................................................................ 3-27 Mounting............................................................... 3-50
EQ21XXPS series Power Supply and Wiring................................................................... 3-50
power supply monitor Installation..................... 3-27 Sensor Separation with DCUEX........................... 3-51
Mounting...................................................................... 3-27 EQ25xxARM Series Agent Release Module................ 3-53
Wiring........................................................................... 3-27 Mounting............................................................... 3-53
Startup......................................................................... 3-29 Wiring................................................................... 3-53
Measuring Battery Voltage and Charging Current........ 3-30 Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action...... 3-55
Jumpers................................................................ 3-55
eqp2XX0PS(–X) power supplIES and
redundancy module installation......................... 3-30 Address Setting.................................................... 3-55
EQ25xxSAM Series Signal Audible Module ................ 3-55
Mounting...................................................................... 3-30
Mounting............................................................... 3-55
Wiring........................................................................... 3-30
Wiring................................................................... 3-55
Startup......................................................................... 3-33
Jumpers................................................................ 3-56
edio module installation.......................................... 3-33 Address Setting.................................................... 3-56
Configuration................................................................ 3-37
System Configuration............................................... 3-57
8 channel DCIO Installation..................................... 3-38 Setting Device Network addresses.............................. 3-57
Mounting...................................................................... 3-38 Overview of Network Addresses........................... 3-57
Wiring........................................................................... 3-38 Setting Field Device Addresses............................ 3-57
Configuration................................................................ 3-42
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS................................................... 3-57
Table of Contents – Continued
Section 4 - Operation EQ21xxPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR........................ 4-15

System Controller....................................................... 4-1 eq2220GFM ground fault monitor......................... 4-15


Pushbuttons................................................................... 4-1
EQ22xxIDC series Initiating Device Circuit......... 4-16
Controller Status Indicators............................................ 4-2
Text Display.................................................................... 4-2 EQ22xxDCU and EQ22xxDCUEX Digital
Controller Menu Options................................................ 4-2 communication Units.................................................. 4-16

Controller Audible Alarm................................................. 4-6 EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module......................... 4-17


ControlNet Status Indicators (Optional).......................... 4-7
Sequence of Events During a Configuration Data EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module......................... 4-17
Download................................................................ 4-7
EQ24xxNE Network Extender................................... 4-17
Controller Redundancy.................................................. 4-9
system startup............................................................. 4-18
Enhanced Discrete I/O Module................................4-11
Pre-Operation Checks.................................................. 4-18
Power-Up Sequence.....................................................4-11
General Start-up Procedures....................................... 4-19
8 CHANNEL DCIO Module.............................................. 4-12 Startup Procedure for Controller.................................. 4-20
Power-Up Sequence.................................................... 4-12 Startup Procedure for EDIO Module............................ 4-20

8 CHANNEL relay Module........................................... 4-13 Startup Procedure for DCIO Module............................ 4-21

Power-Up Sequence.................................................... 4-13

analog input module................................................. 4-14


Power-Up Sequence.................................................... 4-14
Table of Contents – Continued
Section 5 - Maintenance Section 6 - Specifications
EQ3XXX Controller................................................................ 6-1
Routine Maintenance................................................... 5-1
EQ3LTM LON Termination Module........................................ 6-3
Batteries......................................................................... 5-1
EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete I/O Module ...................... 6-3
Manual Check of Output Devices................................... 5-1
EQ3700 DCIO Module........................................................... 6-5
O-Ring Maintenance...................................................... 5-1
EQ3720 Relay Module.......................................................... 6-7
GAS SENSOR MAINTENANCE............................................ 5-1 EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module......................................... 6-7
HART Interface Module......................................................... 6-8
Calibration and Adjustments................................... 5-2
EQ21xxPS Power Supplies................................................... 6-8
Calibration Algorithm A For Manual Calibration
of Universal DCU.................................................... 5-2 EQP2xx0PS(–x) Power Supplies........................................... 6-9
Normal Calibration.................................................. 5-2 Redundancy Module Quint-Diode/40.................................... 6-9
Sensor Replacement.............................................. 5-3 EQ21xxPSM Power Supply Monitor.................................... 6-10
Calibration Algorithm C For Combustible Gas DCUs EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit......................... 6-10
and Automatic Calibration of Universal DCUs........ 5-3 EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor......................................6-11
Routine Calibration................................................. 5-3 EQ22xxDCU Series Digital Communication Unit................ 6-12
Initial Installation and Sensor Replacement — EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module................................... 6-12
Combustible Gas............................................. 5-4 EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module.................................... 6-13
Sensor Replacement — Toxic Gas......................... 5-4 EQ24xxNE Network Extender............................................. 6-13
Calibration Algorithm D For Universal DCUs with O2 EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke & Heat Module.............. 6-14
Sensor.................................................................... 5-5
Combustible Gas Sensor..................................................... 6-14
Normal Calibration.................................................. 5-5
Electrochemical Sensors..................................................... 6-14
Sensor Replacement.............................................. 5-5
EQ21xxPS Power Supply.................................................... 6-14
Calibration Algorithm G For DCUs with PointWatch
or DuctWatch.......................................................... 5-6
Routine Calibration................................................. 5-6 appendix A — fm approval description................. a-1
Sensor Replacement.............................................. 5-6
appendix B — CSA certification description.......b-1
Device Calibration Logs and Records.................. 5-6
appendix C — atex and iecex certification............C-1
troubleshooting........................................................... 5-6
Appendix D — EQP Marine, USCG Approval............D-1
REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................... 5-8
Appendix E — CE Mark...................................................E-1
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN........................................... 5-8
appendix f — rocker switch table......................... f-1
ORDERING INFORMATION................................................. 5-9
appendix g — DEVICE model matriCES.................... g-1
Instructions

Eagle Quantum Premier®


Fire and Gas Detection/
Releasing System

Section 1
Safety

Alert Messages
CAUTION!
The following Alert Messages, DANGER, WARNING, 1. Be sure to read and understand the entire
CAUTION, and IMPORTANT are used throughout this instruction manual before installing or operating the
manual and on the system to alert the reader and Eagle Quantum Premier® system. Only qualified
operator to dangerous conditions and/or important personnel should install, maintain or operate the
operational or maintenance information. system.

DANGER! 2. The wiring procedures in this manual are intended


Identifies immediate hazards that WILL result in to ensure proper functioning of the devices under
severe personal injury or death. normal conditions. However, because of the many
variations in wiring codes and regulations, total
compliance with these ordinances cannot be
WARNING! guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring and
equipment installation meets or exceeds the latest
Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that COULD revisions of the appropriate NFPA Standards,
result in severe personal injury or death. National Electrical Code (NEC), and all local
ordinances. If in doubt, consult the Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) before wiring the system.
CAUTION!
All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the
Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that COULD manufacturer’s recommendations.
result in minor personal injury or damage to
equipment or property. 3. Some Eagle Quantum Premier devices contain
semiconductor devices that are susceptible to
damage by electrostatic discharge. An
IMPORTANT! electrostatic charge can build up on the skin and
A brief statement of fact, experience or importance discharge when an object is touched. Always
that is given as an aid or explanation. observe the normal precautions for handling
electrostatic sensitive devices, i.e. use of a wrist
strap (if available) and proper grounding.
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior 4. To prevent unwanted actuation, alarms and
to removing a junction box cover or opening a extinguishing devices must be secured prior to
detector assembly with power applied. performing system tests.

15.1 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2013 Rev: 12/13 95-8533


Section 2 instruments. Typical output equipment includes
solenoids, strobes, and horns. All equipment is
Introduction monitored for wiring fault conditions.

For complete system integration, the Controller has


System Description the capability to communicate with other systems
such as PLCs and DCSs. Different communication
The Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP) system combines protocols are supported, allowing the Controller to
"fire detection and extinguishing agent release" and communicate with other systems either directly or
"hazardous gas monitoring" in one complete package. through communication gateways.
The system is intended for use in hazardous locations
and is designed to meet the requirements of approval note
agencies from around the world. For specific information relating to the SIL 2 rated
EQP system, refer to manual number 95-8599.
The system consists of a Controller and a number of
addressable microprocessor based field devices.
T h e C o n t ro l l e r c o o rd i n a t e s s y s t e m d e v i c e Communications Loop
configuration, monitoring, annunciation, and control, Eagle Quantum Premier utilizes a Det-Tronics
while the field devices communicate their status and Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), a version of Echelon’s
alarm conditions to the Controller. Local Operation Network (LON) customized
specifically for Eagle Quantum Premier. This network
The EQP controller can be arranged in a redundant provides several key advantages:
configuration, thereby increasing the availability of the
system. The controllers work in “Master” and “Hot • ANSI/NFPA Class X performance of SLC
Standby” mode. • Peer-to-peer communications
• Short message formats
Various combinations of field devices can be
configured as part of the system. The actual selection • Expandability
depends on the requirements of the application and
the regulations that cover the type of protection The Controller utilizes several mechanisms to
required. See Figure 2-1 for a block diagram of the continuously check the LON loop for fault conditions,
Eagle Quantum Premier system. thereby providing the highest level of reliable
communication.
All field devices are tied into a communication loop
that starts and ends at the Controller. Each device Every device on the LON loop has the ability to
connected to the communication loop is assigned a communicate with the Controller at any time. This is
unique identity by setting its address switches. All typically referred to as distributed peer-to-peer
other device operation parameters are configured communications. This design allows for immediate
through Det-Tronics “Safety System Software”. These alarm messages to be sent from the field devices to
selections define the type of device and how it is to the Controller.
operate. This system configuration data is then
downloaded into the Controller. All messages are kept short in order to maximize
network performance. This minimizes network
A p ro g r a m m e d C o n t ro l l e r i s c o n f i g u re d t o bottlenecks.
automatically download the configuration data into the
individual devices when they first communicate with The Eagle Quantum Premier system is easily modified
the Controller. to accommodate design changes or plant expansions.
This can involve adding LON sections, repositioning
In addition to Det-Tronics advanced flame and gas LON sections, or removing LON sections from the loop.
detectors, Eagle Quantum Premier offers the There are LON communication implementation details
capability of incorporating third party fire and gas that affect and limit how the LON loop is changed.
protection equipment into the system. These can be
either input or output devices. Typical input devices Only devices that have been approved for use with
include manual fire alarm "call boxes", heat detectors, Eagle Quantum Premier can be connected up to the
and analog combustible or toxic gas measurement LON. All approved devices have been tested and
certified to operate properly on the LON.

15.1 2-1 95-8533


GAS DETECTION FIRE DETECTION CONFIGURABLE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

COMBUSTIBLE, TOXIC, CONTACT


POINTWATCH OR CLOSURE CONFIGURABLE
OTHER 4-20 MA INPUT DEVICES DRY CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT POINTS

DIGITAL INITIATING
X3301 X3302 UVHT/C7050 UV UVIR IR
COMMUNICATION DEVICE 8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE
DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR
UNITS CIRCUIT
NOTE: CHANNELS CAN BE CONFIGURED
AS EITHER INPUTS OR OUTPUTS.

UD10-DCU
ANALOG
INPUT 8 4-20 MA INPUTS
PIRECL MODULE
GAS
DETECTOR

OPECL RELAY 8 UNSUPERVISED


GAS MODULE RELAY OUTPUT POINTS
DETECTOR UNSUPERVISED INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

AGENT FIRE
8 RELAY RELEASE SUPPRESSION
8 DRY CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT POINTS
APOLLO MODULES (SOL)
DEVICES

TROUBLE RELAY SIGNAL HORNS


(NC CONTACT) AUDIBLE &
ASH POWER
NETWORK EQP CONTROLLER MODULES BEACONS
MODULE SUPPLY
EXTENDER
MONITOR

CONTROLNET ETHERNET or SERIAL ONBOARD


AC 8 CHANNEL EDIO MODULE
(OPTIONAL INTERFACE SERIAL
BATTERY
POWER INTERFACE) BOARD INTERFACE
CHARGER SYSTEM
INPUT
POWER

– + – + CHANNELS CAN BE CONFIGURED AS INPUTS,


OUTPUTS, SMOKE/HEAT DETECTORS,
RS-232 CONFIGURATION CLASS A INPUTS, OR CLASS A OUTPUTS.
PC
RS-485

HSSL
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
or RS-232
or RS-232

SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (SLC)

HARDWIRED I/O RS-485 MODBUS


INTERFACE
M2114
ETHERNET OR SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD

Figure 2-1—Block Diagram of Eagle Quantum Premier System

LON COMMUNICATION HEARTBEAT heartbeat for a period of time, the device will go into a
LON fault isolation. In this situation, the device opens
The Controller continuously broadcasts a heartbeat
one side of the LON and listens for a heartbeat on the
signal over the LON loop. This heartbeat is used for
other side. If the device doesn’t receive a heartbeat, it
verifying the integrity of the LON loop and for keeping
listens on the other side of the LON and opens the
the field devices from going into a fault isolation
opposite LON connection.
mode. Once every second, the heartbeat contains the
current time and date, which are used by the field
devices to log status events and calibrations. THEORY OF OPERATION
During normal operation, the Controller continuously
The Controller continuously tests LON continuity by
checks the system for fault conditions and executes
sending out a heartbeat on one LON port and then
user defined programmed logic that coordinates the
listening for it on the other LON port. The Controller
control of the field devices. At the same time, the field
also broadcasts the heartbeat signal in the opposite
devices are continuously monitoring for device based
direction around the loop. This ensures that all field
fault and alarm conditions.
devices, the LON Network Extenders (NE), and
communication wiring are correctly passing the digital
When a fault condition occurs, the Controller displays
information around the loop.
the fault condition on the Vacuum Fluorescent Text
Display, activates the appropriate fault LED(s),
The field devices use the heartbeat as a mechanism
activates the Trouble signal using the Controller’s
to ensure that there is a communication path back to
internal enunciator, and de-energizes the Controller’s
the Controller. If the field device does not receive a
Trouble relay.

15.1 2-2 95-8533


Table 2-1—Controller Based Faults Table 2-2—Field Device Based Faults

Controller Faults Trouble LON Fault Trouble Field Device Faults Trouble Trouble
Shown on Text Display LED LED Relay Shown on Text Display LED Relay
Controller Fault X X 290 Volt Fault X X
Device Offline X X AC Failed X X
Extra LON Device X X Battery Fault X X
Invalid Config X X Beam Block X X
Lon Fault X X X Calibration Fault X X
LON Ground Fault X X Channel Open X X
Power Fail 1 X X Channel Short X X
Power Fail 2 X X Dirty Optics X X
RTC Fault X X Ground Fault Negative X X
Redundancy Fault* X X Ground Fault Positive X X
*Only for controller pair configured for redundancy. IR Auto Oi Fault X X
IR Fault X X
Controller based fault conditions include the Controller IR Manual Oi Fault X X
status and LON communications such as the Low Aux Power Fault X X
heartbeat being sent around the loop and the field Missing IR Sensor Fault X X
device loss of communications. Controller based fault Missing UV Sensor Fault X X
conditions are listed in Table 2-1.
Power Supply Fault X X
Sensor Fault X X
Field device based fault conditions are transmitted to
the Controller, where they are then annunciated. Refer Supply Voltage Fault X X
to Table 2-2 for a listing of field device faults. Each Tx Lamp Fault X X
field device transmits its status to the Controller UV Auto Oi Fault X X
on a regular basis. UV Fault X X
UV Manual Oi Fault X X
When an alarm condition occurs, the Controller
displays the alarm condition on the text display,
activates the appropriate Alarm LED(s), and activates Each field device must communicate alarm and fault
the alarm signal using the Controller’s internal conditions to the Controller. The timing for transmitting
annunciator. alarms and faults to the Controller is displayed in
Table 2-3.

Table 2-3—Eagle Quantum Premier Status Update Rates

Controller Type # of Devices Output Only Input – No Exception Input – With Exception Input – With Exception
ARM IDC DCU PIRECL
SAM U-Series (UV & UVIR) DCIO, EDIO, AIM
Relay Module
ASH Module
X-Series
OPECL
1 to 100 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second
EQ3001 101 to 200 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 1 Second
201 to 246 5 Seconds 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 1 Second
1 to 50 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second
EQ3150* 51 to 100 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 1 Second
101 to 150 5 Seconds 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 1 Second
EQ3016 1 to 16 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second

*ASH Module cannot be used with EQ3150 Controller.

15.1 2-3 95-8533


Note COMMUNICATION NETWORK FAULT OPERATION
All fault and alarm conditions are latched on the
During normal operation, the Controller is continuously
Controller. To reset the Controller, conditions
broadcasting a heartbeat around the communication
indicated on the text display must currently be in
loop as shown in Figure 2-2. The Controller
the OFF state. Pushing the reset button then
broadcasts the heartbeat in both directions. At the
initiates a Controller reset. Active alarms will
same time, the field devices are transmitting status
remain through a Controller reset.
information to the Controller over the communication
loop.
CONTROLLER LOGS
Every field device except the network extender has
The controller has an internal alarm and event log.
two LON fault isolation relays. Each relay is tied to a
The logs can be accessed via the S 3 software
communication port on the device. When a field
configuration ports (Configuration Port or Port 3) using
device fails to receive the heartbeat from the
a RS-232 serial cable and a Windows ™ computer.
Controller, the device initiates a LON fault isolation
The controller can save up to 4,095 alarms and events
routine. The isolation routine disconnects one of the
in the controller memory.
communication ports via one of the LON fault isolation
relays. The device listens for a heartbeat on the
CONTROLLER USER LOGIC communication port that is connected. If a heartbeat
is not found, the routine then disconnects the other
The Controller continuously executes the user logic
communication port and listens for a heartbeat on the
programs that are programmed using S 3 software.
connected side. The process is repeated until either
The user logic programs are set up in the same
a heartbeat is located or a LON fault timeout period of
fashion as IEC 61131-3 programmable logic
two hours is reached. The LON fault isolation routine
programmed into Programmable Logic Controllers
is disabled and the LON fault isolation relays are
(PLCs). Block diagram logic gates are tied together
closed when the LON fault timeout period has
with inputs, outputs, and other logic gates to perform
elapsed. The LON fault isolation routine will be
a specific task. A number of tasks can be tied
enabled when the device again receives a heartbeat.
together to perform a system function.
For a single wiring fault, the field devices with the fault
Typical programmed functions include flame/gas
will isolate the fault by opening LON fault isolation
voting, timing delays, timing executions, latching
relays. After the field devices isolate the wiring fault,
conditions, alarm and trouble notification, suppression
communications will be resumed between the
control, condition control, and process shutdown
Controller and field devices. Refer to Figure 2-3.
notification.

The Controller executes program logic by starting with NODE 4 NODE 5

the first logic page of the first program and then NODE 3 NODE 6

progressing onto subsequent pages of the same


program. In turn, subsequent programs are then NODE 2 NODE 7
executed. EQP
CONTROLLER
DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

Every one hundred milliseconds, the Controller will


Safety System Controller

NODE 1 Eagle Quantum Premier

NODE 8
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

start executing the user logic that is programmed into


D1851
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

the Controller. Within this logic execution cycle, the Figure 2-2—Normal Communication over the LON
Controller will execute as many of the logic pages as
possible. If all programmed logic is executed in a WIRING FAULT
NODE 4 NODE 5
cycle, the Controller will start executing program logic
NODE 3 NODE 6
with the next cycle. Otherwise, subsequence logic
execution cycles are used to finish executing the
remaining logic gates. Only when all the logic gates NODE 2 PATH A PATH B NODE 7

have been executed will the Controller start over. The EQP
CONTROLLER
Controller will start executing the first logic page of DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER


Safety System Controller

NODE 1 NODE 8
the first program at the beginning of the next logic
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence


D1852

cycle.
Figure 2-3—Communication over the LON with a Single Wiring Fault

15.1 2-4 95-8533


NODE 4 NODE 5
WIRING FAULTS
• 8 programmable unsupervised relay outputs
NODE 3 NODE 6
• RS-485 Modbus RTU communication interface that
supports coils, discrete inputs, and holding
NODE 2 PATH A PATH B NODE 7 registers
EQP
CONTROLLER
DET-TRONICS
®
• Optional ControlNet communication board supports
redundant communication channels.
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Safety System Controller

NODE 1 Eagle Quantum Premier

Time & Date


Fire Alarm

High Gas

Low Gas
Trouble

Cntrl Flt

Lon Fault
Inhibit

Out Inhibit

Ack
Power

Supr

Silence
NODE 8
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

D1853
• Ethernet Interface Board supports configuration,
Figure 2-4—Communication over LON with Multiple Wiring Faults MODBUS TCP/IP, controller redundancy, and
RS-485 MODBUS.
• Serial Interface Board supports configuration, RS-232
MULTIPLE WIRING FAULTS
MODBUS, controller redundancy, and RS-485 MODBUS.
In the event of multiple wiring faults on the LON, the
devices between the faults will continue to function,
but the faults will prevent them from communicating
with the Controller. See Figure 2-4. In this example,
nodes 1 to 4 communicate using one Controller port
(path A) and nodes 7 and 8 use the other Controller
port (path B). Nodes 5 and 6 are unable to report to
the Controller because they are isolated by the two
wiring faults. If a device is prevented from
communicating with the Controller, the text display on
the Controller will show the message “Device Offline”.
Figure 2-5—System Controller

IMPORTANT! Controller Redundancy


Since it is impossible to predict where a network The EQP controllers can be configured as a
fault might occur or exactly what effect it will redundant pair. See Figure 2-6. The redundancy
have on actual system operation, it is important scheme is a hot standby system that offers the
to diagnose and repair any fault as soon as following primary features:
possible after it is detected to ensure continuous,
uninterrupted system operation. • Automatic configuration of the standby controller
• Bumpless transfer
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS • Forced and automatic switchover
The system has three (3) main component groups — • No downtime on controller replacement
the System Controller, LON (Local Operating • Automatic synchronization between controllers
Network), and Intelligent Field Devices.
• Increased system availability

SYSTEM CONTROLLER LON

The Controller (see Figure 2-5) performs all ETHERNET OR


RS-232
ETHERNET
OR MODBUS

communication, command, and control functions for SERIAL LINK RS-485


DCS/PLC/HMI
the system. The Controller supports both “Static” and
“Programmable” logic. Other features include: CONTROLLER A
S3 LON ADDRESS 1
CONFIGURATION
• Redundant controller capability SOFTWARE
HIGH SPEED
RS-232
• User pushbutton controls (reset, acknowledge, etc.) SERIAL LINK

• “Real time” system clock ONE PROJECT FILE


CONTROLLER B
LOADED TO
• Internal alarm sounder CONTROLLER A
LON ADDRESS 2
B2275

• Vacuum fluorescent text based display that shows


current system status Figure 2-6— Block Diagram of EQP System
with Redundant Controllers
• 8 programmable unsupervised inputs

15.1 2-5 95-8533


During normal operation one controller acts as the EQP Controller EQP Controller
“Master” while the other acts as the “Hot Standby”.
Modbus Slave Modbus Slave
Terminology used for redundancy: TCP/IP Server TCP/IP Server
Master controller This is the normal mode for
non-redundant and master 10/100M Ethernet LAN
controllers. User logic is
executed, outputs are being
controlled and all serial and/or
Ethernet ports are active. TCP/IP Client

Standby controller This controller is receiving all Modbus Master


inputs but does not have any
control over the outputs and HMI/DCS
user logic is not executed. The
standby controller receives Figure 2-7—Ethernet TCP/IP Server/Client Relationship
& Modbus RTU Master/Slave Relationship
update information from the
master controller to ensure a
bumpless transfer should a
controller switchover occur. Serial Interface Board
The Serial Interface Board supports up to four
Primary controller The controller assigned
additional serial ports. See Table 2-5. For a
address 1.
redundant controller configuration, the board is
Secondary controller T h e c o n t r o l l e r a s s i g n e d required in both controllers.
address 2.

Bumpless transfer During a controller switchover Controller-to-Controller Communication (SLC485)


no change in output will occur The EQP controllers can be configured to
due to the switchover. communicate with up to 12 controllers via RS-485
communication. The controller-to-controller scheme
Ethernet Interface Board provides the ability to meet NFPA 72 SLC
requirements with the following primary features:
The Ethernet Interface Board supports two additional
serial ports and two Ethernet ports. See Table 2-4. • Modular trouble and alarm configuration
Ethernet supports 10/100 Mbs communication.
Figure 2-7 shows the Ethernet TCP/IP Server/Client • Multiple zone application with controller-to-controller
and Modbus RTU Master/Slave relationship. For a communication
redundant controller configuration, the board is • Multiple media options.
required in both controllers.

Table 2-4—Ports on Ethernet Interface Board Table 2-5—Ports on Serial Interface Board

Port Name Comm Function Port Name Comm Function

ModBus (Master/Slave) ModBus (Master/Slave)


Serial Port 2 RS-485 Ground Fault Monitored, Serial Port 2 RS-485 Ground Fault Monitored,
Isolated Isolated

MODBUS TCP/IP ModBus (Master/Slave)


Serial Port 3 RS-232
Ethernet Port 3 Ethernet (Master/Slave) S3 Configuration
S3 Configuration
Serial Port 4 RS-232 ModBus (Master/Slave)
MODBUS TCP/IP
Ethernet Port 4 Ethernet HSSL Redundancy Redundant Controller to
(Master/Slave) RS-232
Port Controller Only
HSSL Redundancy Redundant Controller to
RS-232
Port Controller Only

15.1 2-6 95-8533


EQP Supervising System (EQPSS) NoteS
A n e t w o r k ex t e n d e r i s r e q u i r e d f o r
The Det-Tronics EQP controllers can be supervised
communication loops greater than 60 nodes.
via the EQPSS using PCs and HMI. Each EQPSS PC
can communicate with up to 12 EQP controllers over
Communication wire segment lengths are
Ethernet. This is a Det-Tronics solution. Please
dependant upon physical and electrical
consult the factory for more information.
characteristics of the cable. Refer to the
installation section for LON cable wire
EQP Marine Application System information.
For information regarding EQP Marine Application
No more than six network extenders may be
Systems, refer to Appendix D.
used on the communication loop.

LOCAL OPERATING NETWORK (LON) When a network extender is installed in the


communication loop, up to 40 field devices can
The LON is a fault tolerant, two wire, digital
be installed per network segment. The network
communication network. The circuit is arranged in a
segment is the wiring segment between two
loop starting and ending at the Controller. The circuit
network extenders or between a network
supports up to 246 intelligent field devices spread
extender and a controller.
over a distance of up to 10,000 meters (32,500 feet).

Note EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and


All LON devices support ANSI/NFPA 72 Class X EQ2100PSM Power Supply Monitor
communication with the Controller.
The Power Supply, Power Supply Monitor, and backup
batteries are used to provide power to the system.
Network Extenders The power supply monitor communicates trouble
conditions to the Controller. Monitored status
Transmitted signals can travel a maximum distance of
conditions include: power supply failure, loss of AC
2,000 meters through LON communication wire. At
power, loss of battery power, power ground fault, AC
the end of this distance, a network extender (see
and DC voltage (hi/low level), and backup battery
Figure 2-8) must be installed to rebroadcast the
current charge levels.
communications into the next wire segment. For
every network extender added, the length of the
The Power Supply provides main and backup power
communications loop extends up to 2,000 meters.
to the EQP System. The device includes many
Due to propagation delays around the loop, the
features such as voltage regulation, high efficiency,
maximum loop length is limited to 10,000 meters.
and high power factor.

An equalize switch is located on the front panel of the


charger for manual activation, or a multi-mode
electronic timer can be used for automatic activation.
Steady state output voltage remains within +/– 1/2%
of the setting from no load to full load for AC input
voltages within +/– 10% of the nominal input voltage.

EQP21XXPS(–X) Power Supplies and


EQP2410PS(–P) Converter
The Power Supplies and Converter provide main and
backup power to the EQP System in ordinary and
marine applications. Refer to Section 3 of this manual
for complete information.

Figure 2-8—Eagle Quantum Premier Network Extender

15.1 2-7 95-8533


EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module
The 8 Channel EDIO Module (see Figure 2-10)
expands the Input and Output capability of the Eagle
Quantum Premier System.

The unit is designed to provide continuous and


automated fire/gas protection, while ensuring system
operation through continuous supervision of System
Inputs/Outputs.
Figure 2-9—Ground Fault Monitor
The EDIO module provides eight channels of
configurable input or output points that can be
EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor programmed for supervised or unsupervised
operation. Each input point can accept fire detection
The EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor (see Figure
devices such as heat, smoke, or unitized flame
2-9) provides ground fault monitoring in a system that
detectors. Each output point can be configured for
includes a floating 24 Vdc power source. The device
signaling or releasing output operation. Each channel
detects ground fault conditions on +/– power and all
on the module is provided with individual indicators
secondary I/O circuits. A positive or negative ground
for active and fault conditions.
fault condition is indicated immediately by local
LEDs, and by a relay contact after a 10 second time
important
delay. The ground fault monitor is intended to be
For Class A wiring, two input/output channels
mounted in the same enclosure as the controller.
are combined, thereby supporting up to four
input/output circuits.
FIELD DEVICES
NOTE
Flame Detectors An input must be active for at least 750
milliseconds in order to be recognized.
For flame detector installation, operation,
maintenance, specifications and ordering information,
The EDIO module can be mounted directly to a panel,
refer to Table 2-6.
or it can be DIN rail mounted. System status can be
determined using the trouble-shooting procedures,
For information regarding USCG Approval of the
Eagle Quantum Safety System Software (S3) and the
X3301 Flame Detector, refer to Appendix D.
status indicators on the module.
note
Refer to the Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module
Existing Eagle Quantum field devices such as
Specification Data sheet (form number 90-1189) for
EQ22xxUV and EQ22xxUVIR are supported by the
additional information.
Eagle Quantum Premier system (not FM Approved).

Table 2-6—Flame Detector Manuals

Detector Manual Number


X3301 95-8527
X3301A 95-8527 & 95-8534
X3302 95-8576
X5200 95-8546
X2200 95-8549
X9800 95-8554
UVHT 95-8570

Figure 2-10—Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module

15.1 2-8 95-8533


EQ3700 8 Channel DCIO Module EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module
The 8 Channel Discrete Input/Output (DCIO) Module The 8 Channel Relay Module (see Figure 2-12)
(see Figure 2-11) consists of eight individually consists of eight individually configured output
configured channels. Each channel is configured as channels.
either an input or output with the appropriate wiring
supervision. Wiring supervision includes none, open Note
circuits, and "open and short" circuits. In addition to The relay module only supports equipment that
defining the type of supervision, an input channel is operates on 24 vdc (not to exceed 2 amperes) at
also configured to generate the appropriate static each output channel.
logic alarm message to the controller.
The relay module has two LEDs for the device and
Note two LEDs for each channel. On the device level, one
NFPA 72 requires wire supervision selection for green LED indicates power, while the other amber
fire detection and notification devices (IDC, NAC, LED indicates a LON CPU fault. For each channel,
supervisory and releasing devices). one red LED indicates channel activation and the
other amber LED indicates that the module operating
Heat, smoke, or unitized flame detectors can be wired voltage is low or that the module has not been
into channels defined as inputs. Horns, strobes/ configured (all eight channel LEDs blink).
beacons, and solenoids can be wired into channels
defined as outputs. Refer to the Relay Module Specification Data sheet
(form number 90-1181) for additional information.
Note
The DCIO outputs only support equipment that
operates on 24 vdc (not to exceed 2 amperes
per channel).

The DCIO has two device status LEDs, as well as two


LEDs for each channel. On the device level, one
green LED indicates power, while the other amber
LED indicates a LON CPU fault. For each channel,
one red LED indicates channel activation and the
other amber LED indicates a fault condition when
wiring supervision is defined for the channel.

Refer to the DCIO Specification Data sheet (form Figure 2-12—Eight Channel Relay Module
number 90-1149) for additional information.

Figure 2-11—DCIO Module

15.1 2-9 95-8533


EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke & Heat Module
The 8 Channel Analog Input Module (see Figure 2-13) The Addressable Smoke and Heat (ASH) Module (see
provides a means of connecting devices with a Figure 2-14) is an interface device designed to provide
calibrated 4-20 mA output signal to the Eagle continuous and automated fire protection for the EQP
Quantum Premier System. system.

The Analog Input Module (AIM) provides 8 The ASH module is located directly on the LON of the
configurable channels that can be set for either EQP system, with a loop of up to 64 addressable devices
combustible gas mode or universal mode. The tied into the ASH module. This allows all of the flame,
combustible gas mode provides a number of gas, and addressable smoke and heat detectors to run
automatically programmed settings, and alarm on one system, enabling the EQP controller to annunciate
thresholds that are limited to approval body a fire alarm from either its own LON based I/O, or from the
requirements. The universal mode is used for generic connected addressable smoke and heat detection loops.
devices where control over all configuration The EQP controller can support up to 10 ASH modules.
parameters is required. All devices must provided
their own calibration facilities. The ASH module can support a variety of Apollo Discovery
and XP95 devices, including smoke, heat, manual call,
For fire detector 4-20 mA inputs, the Analog Input sounders, beacons and I/O modules. The addressable
Module (AIM) is certified for use as an NFPA 72 Class devices are configured individually via the S3 software.
B Approved input.
To ensure reliable system operation, the ASH module
Refer to the Analog Input Module Specification Data continuously monitors its input and output circuits for
sheet (for m number 90-1183) for additional opens and short circuit conditions.
information.
During normal operation, the ASH module continuously
checks the loop for fault conditions and executes user
defined programmed logic that coordinates the control
of the field devices. The ASH module reports any device
based fault and alarm conditions to the EQP controller.

The EQP Controller continuously monitors the status of


the ASH module, as well as the status of each device
connected to the ASH module. ASH module alarm and
fault status conditions are logged in the EQP controller.

System status can be determined using S3 software or


Figure 2-13—Eight Channel Analog Input Module
the status indicators on the ASH module, where LEDs
annunciate power on, faults, or an active device on the
loop.

Refer to the ASH module instruction manual (form


number 95-8654) for additional information.

Figure 2-14—Addressable Smoke & Heat Module

15.1 2-10 95-8533


EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module The device can monitor and control two output
devices (24 vdc rated) that are programmed and
The EQ25xxARM Series Agent Release Module
energized together. The release circuits are
(ARM) (see Figure 2-15) provides agent release or
compatible with a variety of solenoid or initiator based
deluge pre-action capability. The device is controlled
suppression systems.
by programmable logic in the Controller. Time delay,
abort and manual release sequences allow the device
The release circuit is supervised for open circuit
output to be programmed for use in unique
conditions. If a trouble condition occurs (open circuit
applications.
or solenoid supply voltage less than 19 volts), it will
be indicated at the Controller. Each output is rated at
The device is field programmed to operate in one of
2 amperes and auxiliary input terminals are provided
the following modes:
for additional 24 vdc output power where needed.
Timed– Output is activated for a field
selectable duration from 1 to 65,000 NOTE
seconds. For deluge and pre-action applications, the input
Continuous– Output latches until reset. voltage to the ARM or DCIO must be 21 VDC
Non-latching– Output follows the input. minimum with connection to any solenoid listed
in Table 2-7 or 2-8. Wiring must be in
accordance with the listed maximum wiring
lengths.

Refer to the EQ25xxARM Specification Data sheet


(form number 90-1128) for additional information

Table 2-7—Solenoid Compatibility with Agent Release Module


for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

FM Group Device
B ASCO T8210A107
D ASCO 8210G207
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
H Viking 11601

Figure 2-15—Agent Release Module

Table 2-8—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)


D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking 11601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

15.1 2-11 95-8533


EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)
The EQ25xxSAM Series Signal Audible Module (SAM) There are three IDC models available (see Figure 2-17):
(see Figure 2-16) provides two indicating circuits for
controlling UL Listed 24 vdc polarized audible/visual The EQ22xxIDC allows discrete inputs from smoke/
indicating appliances. heat detectors, manual call stations or other contact
devices.
The device is located on the LON and is controlled by
programmable logic in the Controller. The IDC accepts two dry contact inputs for use with
devices such as relays, pushbuttons, key switches,
Each output circuit is independently programmable to etc. The IDC supports ANSI/NFPA 72 Class B
allow notification of separate events. Each output can supervised input circuits
be individually activated for any one of the following
pre-defined outputs: Each circuit requires its own end of line (EOL) resistor
for monitoring circuit continuity. Nominal resistance of
1. Continuous the resistor is 10 k ohms.
2. 60 beats per minute
The EQ22xxIDCGF Initiating Device Circuit Ground
3. 120 beats per minute Fault Monitor (IDCGF) responds to the presence of a
ground fault within the power circuitry of the system.
4. Temporal pattern.
It provides an unsupervised dry contact input and
ground fault monitoring circuitry for indicating a power
Device outputs operate in the reverse polarity manner supply trouble condition. It is intended for use with a
when activated. Each output is rated at 2 amperes. third party power supply.
Auxiliary power input terminals are provided for
additional 24 vdc signaling power where required. The EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Device Circuit Short
The output circuits are supervised for open and short Circuit (IDCSC) is similar to the IDC, but supports
circuit conditions. If a wiring fault occurs, a trouble supervision per EN 54 for European installations.
condition will be indicated at the Controller.
Refer to the EQ22xxIDC Specification Data sheet
Refer to the EQ25xxSAM Specification Data sheet (form number 90-1121) for additional information.
(form number 90-1129) for additional information

Figure 2-17—Initiating Device Circuit


Figure 2-16—Signal Audible Module
Note
Input types (e.g. fire alarm, trouble, and gas
alarms) are configurable through Det-Tronics
Safety System Software (S3).

15.1 2-12 95-8533


EQ22xxDCU and EQ22xxDCUEX PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse
Digital Communication Units
The Pointwatch Eclipse® Model PIRECL is a diffusion-
The EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit (DCU) is based, point-type infrared gas detector that provides
an analog signal input device that accepts a 4 to 20 continuous monitoring of combustible hydrocarbon
milliampere signal. The device is typically connected gas concentrations in the range of 0 to 100% LFL.
to gas detectors, where the analog signal represents
the gas concentration. The LON supervision meets Signaling Line Circuit
(Class X) requirements per NFPA72: 2010 for the
Calibration of the DCU involves a non-intrusive Model PIRECL.
procedure that can be performed by one person at
the device without declassifying the area. For PIRECL installation, operation, maintenance,
specifications and ordering information, refer to form
The device supports two alarm setpoints that are number 95-8526.
defined as part of the device’s configuration setup. NOTE
When detecting combustible gases, the alarm The low alarm range for the EQP PIRECL is
setpoints represent low and high gas alarm levels. 5-40% LFL (the standard PIRECL is 5-60% LFL).
When detecting oxygen, the alarms represent the
range for the acceptable oxygen level. If oxygen For information regarding USCG Approval of the
drops below the alarm range, a low alarm is PIRECL Detector, refer to Appendix D.
generated by the device.
OPECL Open Path Eclipse
PointWatch/DuctWatch IR gas detector as well as
electrochemical sensors (hydrogen sulfide, carbon The Open Path Eclipse™ Model OPECL is an open
monoxide, chlorine, sulfur dioxide, and nitrogen path infrared gas detection system that provides
dioxide) are examples of devices that can be continuous monitoring of combustible hydrocarbon
connected to the DCU. gas concentrations in the range of 0 to 5 LFL-meters,
over a distance of 5 to 120 meters.
Note
A catalytic sensor can be connected to a DCU The LON supervision meets Signaling Line Circuit
through a transmitter, which converts the millivolt (Class X) requirements per NFPA72: 2010 for the
signal to a 4 to 20 milliampere signal. Model OPECL.

The EQ22xxDCUEX is a specialized version of the For OPECL installation, operation, maintenance,
DCU that contains a transmitter for connection to a specifications and ordering information, refer to form
Det-Tronics Model CGS catalytic combustible gas number 95-8556.
sensor.
UD10 DCU Emulator
Refer to the EQ22xxDCU Specification Data sheet
(form number 90-1118) for additional information. The FlexVu® Model UD10 DCU Emulator (UD10-DCU)
is designed for applications that require a gas detector
with digital readout of detected gas levels. Its LON
interface board makes the UD10-DCU compatible with
Eagle Quantum Premier systems by digitizing the 4-20
mA analog signal from the attached sensor/transmitter
and transmitting the value as a process variable over
the LON to the EQP controller. The UD10-DCU is
designed for use with most currently available
Det‑Tronics gas detectors.

For a list of compatible gas detectors, as well as


infor mation regarding installation, operation,
maintenance, specifications and ordering information,
refer to form number 95-8656.

15.1 2-13 95-8533


Section 3 CAUTION!
Installation A ny d ev i a t i o n f ro m t h e m a n u fa c t u re r ’s
recommended wiring practices can compromise
system operation and effectiveness. ALWAYS
NOTE
consult the factory if different wire types or
For specific information regarding systems
methods are being considered.
meeting EN54 standards, refer to the EQ5400
Series operation manual 95-8642.
Note
All field wiring must be marked per NFPA 70
Article 760.
SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS Note
Specific installation requirements may differ
Many factors need to be considered when
depending on local installation practices and
determining proper EQP System design. The
compliance with third party certifications. For
following paragraphs will discuss these factors and
local installation practices, consult the local
other issues useful in designing, installing and
authority having jurisdiction. For compliance
configuring the Eagle Quantum Premier System.
with third party certifications, consult the
appropriate appendix in this manual for
IDENTIFYING THE AREA OF PROTECTION additional installation requirements.
In order for the system to provide optimum coverage
and protection, it is critical to properly define the
Power Wiring
required “Area of Protection” (total area being
monitored by the system). The area of protection
should include all hazard sources requiring IMPORTANT!
monitoring, as well as suitable locations for mounting
For deluge and pre-action applications, input
detection, extinguishing, notification, and manual
voltage to the DCIO or ARM must be 21 vdc
devices. In order to accurately define the area of
minimum to ensure proper operation of the
protection and provide maximum protection, all
connected output device.
potential “Real” and “False” hazard sources must be
identified. The number and location of Real Hazards
determines the extent of the area of protection, and
impacts all subsequent design decisions. IMPORTANT
To ensure proper operation of field devices, the
voltage input to the device (measured at the
WARNING! device) must be within the range indicated for
that device in the “Specifications” section of this
When drilling through surfaces in the process of
manual (18 Vdc minimum).
mounting equipment, verify that the location is
free of electrical wiring and electrical
components.
System Wiring (ATEX and IECEx)
For the interconnection of the modules within the EQP
system, use fixed installed wiring. (For correct wiring
IDENTIFYING WIRING, NETWORK (LON), AND
size and type for a specific device, refer to the
SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS
appropriate section in this manual.)
General Wiring Requirements
For ambient temperatures below –10°C and above
+60°C, use field wiring suitable for both minimum and
WARNING! maximum ambient temperatures.
DO NOT open any junction box or device
enclosure when power is applied without first
de-classifying the hazardous area.

15.1 3-1 95-8533


The EQP Ex n modules may only be installed, A power supply wiring diagram should contain
connected or removed when the area is known to be information describing wire distances and current
non-hazardous. The screw terminals are to be draws associated with all devices connected to the
tightened with a minimum torque of 0.5 Nm. wire segment. A typical power supply wiring
Equipotential bonding connection facilities on the recommendation is that the voltage drop from the
outside of electrical equipment shall provide effective power source to the end device should not exceed
connection of a conductor with a cross-sectional area ten percent. Using 24 vdc as a reference, the
of at least 4 mm2. maximum voltage drop should not exceed 2.4 vdc. A
wire gauge must be selected to ensure that the end
The Eagle Quantum Premier system utilizes a power device has at least 21.6 vdc or higher.
supply that provides an isolated 24 vdc battery
backed-up power to the fire protection devices as In order to calculate the power supply voltage for the
described in NFPA 72. More than one power supply end device, calculate the voltage drops that occur
may be used in a system to provide power to different due to each wire segment between the devices. This
sets of equipment as part of the system. involves determining the total current draw and the
two conductor wire resistance per each wire segment.
The power supply wiring may consist of one or more
daisy-chained wire segments providing power to the Example:
devices. For each of the daisy-chained wire Can 18 AWG wire be used to power three devices
segments, the installer must calculate the voltage from the 24 vdc power supply? Refer to the figure
drops that occur across the devices in order to below for wiring and device current draw information
determine the gauge of the wire that will be installed. along with voltage drop calculations.

Answer: If the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)


requires a voltage loss of 10% or less, only 16 AWG
wire could be used, since the end device would
require 21.4 vdc. If there is no local requirement, then
18 AWG wire could be used to provide power to the
devices.

24 vdc Power 18 AWG Single Wire Resistance: R = 0.6385 Ohms per 100 ft
Supply 2 Conductor Resistance: CR = 2 • R

Total Current
695 mA Device 1
50 ft Device 1 Voltage = Supply Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
0.6385 Ohms = 24 – (I • CR)
65 mA
Current Draw = 24 – (0.695 • 0.6385)
= 23.55 vdc

Total Current
630 mA
150 ft =
1.9155 Ohms Device 2
+
Device 3 Device 2
Device 2 Voltage = Device 1 Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
65 mA = 23.55 – (I • CR)
Current Draw = 23.55 – (0.630 • 1.9155)
= 22.35 vdc

Total Current
565 mA
150 ft =
1.9155 Ohms Device 3

Device 3
Device 3 Voltage = Device 2 Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
565 mA = 22.35 – (I • CR)
Current Draw = 22.35 – (0.565 • 1.9155)
= 21.27 vdc

15.1 3-2 95-8533


Determining Power Requirements
Tables 3-1 and 3-2 are provided for calculating the
total current requirements for those parts of the
system requiring battery backup.

Table 3–1—Standby Current Requirements at 24 vdc

Device Type Number of Devices Standby Current Total Current for Device Type
EQP Controller X 0.360 =
EQ3LTM Module X 0.001 =
EDIO Module X 0.075 =
DCIO Module X 0.075 =
Power Supply. Monitor X 0.060 =
IDC/IDCGF/IDCSC X 0.055 =
X3301/X3301A - w/o heater X 0.160 =
X3301/X3301A - with heater X 0.565 =
X3302 - without heater X 0.160 =
X3302 - with heater X 0.565 =
X2200 X 0.135 =
X9800 - without heater X 0.085 =
X9800 - with heater X 0.420 =
X5200 - without heater X 0.155 =
X5200 - with heater X 0.490 =
DCUEX X 0.145 =
DCU with EC Sensor X 0.060 =
DCU with PointWatch X 0.300 =
DCU with DuctWatch X 0.300 =
Relay Module X 0.120 =
Analog Input Module X 0.160 =
EQ2220GFM X 0.018 =
PIRECL X 0.270 =
OPECL Transmitter X 0.220 =
OPECL Receiver X 0.220 =
ARM X 0.075 =
SAM X 0.060 =
Network Extender X 0.090 =
ASH Module X 0.560 =
EQ21xxPS Power Supply X 0.350 =
Other X =
Total Standby Current for System (in amperes) =

Note: Standby current is the average current draw for the device in normal mode.
This table is for battery calculations only.

15.1 3-3 95-8533


Table 3-2—Alarm Current Requirements at 24 Vdc

Device Type Number of Devices Alarm Current Total Current for Device Type
EQP Controller X 0.430 =
EQ3LTM Module X 0.001 =
EDIO 8 Inputs X 0.130 =
EDIO 8 Outputs X 0.075 =
DCIO 8 Inputs X 0.130 =
DCIO 8 Outputs X 0.075 =
Relay Module X 0.120 =
Power Supply Monitor X 0.060 =
IDC/IDCGF/IDCSC X 0.090 =
X3301/X3301A - w/o heater X 0.160 =
X3301/X3301A - with heater X 0.565 =
X3302 - without heater X 0.160 =
X3302 - with heater X 0.565 =
X2200 X 0.135 =
X9800 - without heater X 0.085 =
X9800 - with heater X 0.420 =
X5200 - without heater X 0.155 =
X5200 - with heater X 0.490 =
DCUEX X 0.160 =
DCU with EC Sensor X 0.075 =
DCU with PointWatch X 0.320 =
DCU with DuctWatch X 0.320 =
Analog Input Module X 0.300 =
EQ2220GFM X 0.018 =
PIRECL X 0.275 =
OPECL Transmitter X 0.220 =
OPECL Receiver X 0.220 =
ARM X 0.120 =
SAM X 0.120 =
Network Extender X 0.090 =
ASH Module X 0.560 =
EQ21xxPS Power Supply X 0.350 =
Other X =
Total Solenoid Load +
Total Signaling Load +
Total Alarm Current for System (in amperes) =

Note: This table is for battery calculations only.

15.1 3-4 95-8533


Table 3-3A—EQ21xxPS Power Supply Specifications

Power Supply
Characteristic
EQ2110PS/EQ2111PS EQ2130PS/EQ2131PS EQ2175PS/EQ2176PS
Input Voltage 120 vac 120/208/240 vac 120/208/240 vac
Input Current 4 Amps 11/6/6 Amps 24/15/12 Amps
Input Frequency 60 Hz – EQ2110PS 60 Hz – EQ2130PS 60 Hz – EQ2175PS
Input Frequency 50 Hz – EQ2111PS 50 Hz – EQ2131PS 50 Hz – EQ2176PS
Supply Rating 10 Amps 30 Amps 75 Amps
Maximum Alarm Current 10 Amps 30 Amps 75 Amps
Maximum Standby Current 3.33 Amps 10 Amps 25 Amps
Recharge Current 6.67 Amps 20 Amps 50 Amps
Minimum Battery Capacity** 40 AmpHours 120 AmpHours 300 AmpHours
Maximum Battery Capacity 100 AmpHours 300 AmpHours 750 AmpHours
Maximum Deluge Standby Current* 1 Amp 3 Amps 7.5 Amps

*Only applies to 90 hour back-up applications.


**Use a battery with a maximum charge rate that exceeds 25% of the rating of the power supply.

EQ211xPS, EQ213xPS and EQ217xPS Power Supplies Battery Charger


Refer to Table 3-3A for Power Supply ratings. Use the following formula to calculate the minimum
battery charger size:
Backup Battery
Refer to Table 3-4 or 3-5 to calculate the minimum Minimum = Alarm Current + Total Amp Hours
size of the backup battery (in amp hours). Select a Charge Rate 48
sealed lead-acid battery with an adequate amp hour
rating.
CAUTION!
NOTE Care should be taken when considering the final
Connect two batteries in series for 24 volts. voltage at the device during AC power loss. With
Batteries must be protected from physical damage. loss of AC power, the device voltage will drop
The battery installation shall be adequately over time as the batteries lose their charge. If
ventilated. extended periods of AC power loss are to be
expected, either consider a heavier wire gauge
or specify batteries with higher amp-hour ratings.

15.1 3-5 95-8533


Table 3-4—Backup Battery Requirements for Automatic Release of Extinguishing Systems Except Deluge

Standby Current Standby Time* Standby Amp Hours


X =
24 Hours

Alarm Current 5 Minute Alarm Time* Alarm Amp Hours


X =
0.083 Hours

Sum of Standby and Alarm Amp Hours =


Multiply by 1.2 (20% Safety Factor) X
T0014B

Total Battery Amp Hour Requirement

* FM MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS


IS 24 HOURS STANDBY TIME AND 5 MINUTES ALARM TIME.

Table 3-5—Backup Battery Requirements for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Standby Current Standby Time* Standby Amp Hours


X =
90 Hours

Alarm Current 10 Minute Alarm Time* Alarm Amp Hours


X =
0.166 Hours

Sum of Standby and Alarm Amp Hours =


Multiply by 1.2 (20% Safety Factor) X
T0040B

Total Battery Amp Hour Requirement

* FM MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR DELUGE SYSTEMS IS


90 HOURS STANDBY TIME AND 10 MINUTES ALARM TIME.

EQP21X0PS(–X) Power Supplies Refer to Table 3-3B for power supply ratings.
The EQP2110PS(–P) and EQP2120PS(–B) Power
IMPORTANT
Supplies are used in pairs where the primary source of
The EQP21X0PS(–X) Power Supplies provide
input supply is connected to one and the secondary
EQP System devices with power from input
source is connected to the other. Each power supply may
supply 120 to 220 V ac. Use of this power supply
be backed up by another power supply of the same
does not provide the source of the secondary
model or by a DC-DC converter (see Figures 3-23A, B
supply such as secondary source batteries, their
and C for available configurations). A maximum of eight
supervision or charging, or UPS. Per NFPA
power supplies operated in parallel can be connected to
72-2010 requirements, such power supply
each input supply. Both the primary and secondary sets
related requirements must be separately
must be individually capable of operating the system
provided for and be accepted by the local
without the other supply. The secondary source is
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
required to be continuously powered.

The use of these supplies is based upon acceptance EQP2410PS(–P) Converter


of the local AHJ of the secure supply system that
The EQP2410PS(–P) Converter converts the DC input
provides the secondary supply. These supplies must
voltage to an adjustable, controlled and galvanically
be used in a redundant configuration, where one
separated 24 Vdc output voltage. The converter is
bank of supplies is fed from the primary source and
always connected to the secondary source.
the other bank from the secondary source. Both
primary and secondary supplies shall be continuously
available and both rated for a minimum 100% of load.

15.1 3-6 95-8533


Table 3-3B – EQP2XX0PS Power Supply and Converter Specifications

Device
Characteristic EQP2110PS(-P) EQP2120PS(-B) EQP2410PS(-P)
Power Supply Power Supply Converter

Input Frequency 60/50 60/50 N/A

Input Voltage 120/220 Vac 120/220 Vac 24 Vdc

Input Current, Max. 3.2 / 1.7 Iac 6.6 / 3.6 Iac 15.7 Idc

Output Voltage Range 24.5 … 28.0 Vdc 24.5 … 28.0 Vdc 24.5 … 28.0 Vdc

Supply Rating 10 20 10

Maximum Alarm Current 10 20 10

Maximum Standby Current 10 20 10

91% for 120 Vac


Efficiency 88% 88%
93% for 220 Vac

Determining Power Requirements For Standby Current (amperes ac) requirements, use
Total Standby Current (amperes dc) for the system’s
Use of the EQP2110PS(–P) and EQP2120PS(–B)
applicable field devices from Table 3-1.
Power Supplies provides the primary and secondary
supplies.
For Alarm Current (amperes ac) requirements, use
Total Alarm current (amperes dc) for the system’s
The EQP2410PS(–P) Conver ter provides the
applicable field devices from Table 3-2.
secondary supply only. It is used in conjunction with
the EQP2110PS(–P) or EQP2120PS(–B) Power
note
Supplies, which serve as the primary supply (see
The suffix (-P) or (-B) defines the method for
Figures 3-23A, B and C for available configurations).
mounting the panel mount models:
The customer is responsible for providing adequate
(-P) = mounting plate
secondary power supply source needs. The ac input
(-B) = mounting brackets.
current requirements for EQP2XX0PS(–X) in relation to
EQP system dc current load (power supply output)
are calculated using the following formula:

Input Current = [Output Current x Output Voltage÷


Input Voltage ÷ Efficiency] + 0.43 A

Example:
[20 Adc x 28 Vdc ÷ 120 Vac ÷ 0.91] + 0.43 = 5.56 Aac

15.1 3-7 95-8533


Shield Grounding
caution!
Two shield ground terminals are provided inside the
junction box of each device, and also at the System ALWAYS discharge static charges from hands
Controller. Connect shield ends to the terminals before handling electronic devices or touching
provided (not to each other) inside the junction box. device terminals. Many devices contain
semiconductors that are susceptible to damage
CAUTION! by electrostatic discharge.

Insulate the shields to prevent shorting to the


device housing or to any other conductor. Refer Note
to Appendix E for EMC Directive requirements. For more information on proper handling, refer to
Det-Tronics Service Memo form 75-1005.

Junction Box Grounding


GROUND FAULT MONITOR (GFM)
All junction boxes must be electrically connected to INSTALLATION
earth ground.

Mounting
Response Time vs. System Size
The GFM is a DIN rail mountable device designed to be
When designing a system, it is important to realize mounted in the same enclosure as the EQP controller.
that by increasing the number of nodes (devices) on
the communication loop, the amount of time required
for a status change message from a detection device Wiring
to reach the System Controller also increases. 1. Connect power wiring from the EQP controller power
terminals 1 and 2 to the GFM terminals 1 and 2.
The System Controller requires a specific length of
time to process each bit of information that is 2. Connect power wiring from the GFM terminals 3 and
transferred along the communication loop. As the 4 to the EQP controller power terminals 3 and 4.
number of nodes increases, so does the amount of
data being processed as well as the time required for 3. Connect earth ground to terminal 5 or 10.
processing by the Controller.
4. Connect the relay contacts as required.
If the fastest possible communication response time is
an important criteria for a large system, it is Refer to Figure 3-1 for terminal block identification.
recommended that the number of nodes on an
individual loop be kept as small as possible. Consider
24 VDC
using multiple controllers with fewer nodes per loop. INPUT VOLTAGE

EARTH
Moisture Damage Protection + – + – GROUND

Moisture can adversely affect the performance of 1 2 3 4 5


electronic devices. It is important to take proper
+ – + –
precautions during system installation to ensure that
moisture will not come in contact with electrical
connections or components. RELAY

In applications where the network wiring is installed in


conduit, the use of watertight conduit seals, drains, SPARE

breathers, or equivalent is recommended to prevent 6 7 8 9 10


damage caused by condensation within the conduit.
COMMON NO NC N/C EARTH
GROUND
Electrostatic Discharge
NOTE: RELAY CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN THE REST STATE,
An electrostatic charge can build up on the skin and NO POWER APPLIED. RELAY IS ENERGIZED WITH
POWER APPLIED AND NO GROUND FAULT
discharge when an object is touched. ALWAYS use (TERMINALS 6 & 7 CLOSE, TERMINALS 6 & 8 OPEN).
caution when handling devices, taking care not to
touch the terminals or electronic components. Figure 3-1—Terminal Configuration for Ground Fault Monitor

15.1 3-8 95-8533


NETWORK AND NETWORK Table 3-7—LON Maximum Cable Lengths
EXTENDER INSTALLATION
LON Cable Maximum Length**
(Manufacturer and Part No.)* Feet Meters
Mounting
Belden 3073F (Tray Rated) 6,500 2,000
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
Det-Tronics NPLFP 6,500 2,000
free surface. (See the “Specifications” section in this
manual for device dimensions.) Technor BFOU 4,900 1,500
Rockbestos Gardex Fieldbus***
Wiring 1 Shielded Pair, 16 AWG,
Type TC, p/n FB02016-001 6,500 2,000
All devices on the LON are wired in a loop that starts
1 Shielded Pair, 18 AWG,
and ends at the System Controller. To ensure proper Type TC, p/n FB02018-001 6,500 2,000
operation, the LON should be wired using high speed
communication grade cable. Note: *Use the same type of cable in each wiring segment
between network extenders.
Note **Maximum wire lengths represent the linear wire distance of
Cable meeting the specifications listed in Table LON communications wiring between network extenders.
3-6 is suitable for distances up to 2000 meters. Be sure that selected cable meets all job specifications.
If necessary, consult factory for further suggested cable
types.
Any of the cable types listed in Table 3-7 can be used
***Cables designed to ISA SP50 Type A or IEC 61158-2
for wiring the LON for the distances indicated.
Type A are suitable for use in LON/SLC wiring. For armored
version, contact cable manufacturer.
Note
If no network extenders are used, the distances
listed are for the entire loop. If network extenders
are used, the distances listed are for the wiring
length between network extenders or between a
network extender and the System Controller.

Table 3-6—Typical Specification for 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) LON Wiring Cable per Echelon

Minimum Typical Maximum Units Condition

DC Resistance, each conductor 14 14.7 15.5 ohm/km 20 C per ASTM D 4566


DC Resistance Unbalanced 5% 20 C per ASTM D 4566
Mutual Capacitance 55.9 nF/km per ASTM D 4566
Characteristic Impedance 92 100 108 ohm 64 kHz to 1 MHz, per ASTM D 4566
Attenuation 20 kHz 1.3 dB/km 20 C per ASTM D 4566
64 kHz 1.9
78 kHz 2.2
156 kHz 3
256 kHz 4.8
512 kHz 8.1
772 kHz 11.3
1000 kHz 13.7
Propagation Delay 5.6 nsec/m 78 kHz
T0049B
Length:6,500 feet/2000
Length: 6,500 feet/2000 meters maximum
meters maximum (basic
(basic loop loop or between
or between NetworkNetwork Extenders).
Extenders).
Type:Single twisted
Type: Single twisted pair.
pair.
WireGauge:
Wire Gauge:16 16 AWG,
AWG, stranded
stranded (19(19 x 29),
x 29), tinned
tinned copper
copper withwith overall
overall shield.
shield.
Cablesmeeting
Cables meetingthese
thesespecifications
specificationsare
aregood
goodfor
forup
uptoto2000
2000meters.
meters.

15.1 3-9 95-8533


Table 3-8—Maximum Wiring Length from Nominal 24 vdc
Power Source to Network Extender (Maximum wire lengths are
IMPORTANT! based upon the cable’s physical and electrical characteristics.)
Det-Tronics recommends the use of shielded
Maximum Wiring Distance
cable (required by ATEX) to prevent external Wire Size
Feet Meters
electromagnetic interference from affecting field
devices. 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)* 2200 650
16 AWG (1.5 mm2)* 3500 750
14 AWG (2.5 mm2)* 5600 1700
IMPORTANT!
* Approximate Metric Equivalent.
Be sure that the selected cable meets the
specifications. The use of other cable types can
degrade system operation. If necessary, consult
factory for further suggested cable types.
3. Connect shields to the designated "shield"
1. Remove the cover from the Network Extender terminals. The two shield terminals are connected
enclosure. internally to ensure shield continuity.
2. Connect 24 vdc power lead wires and CAUTION!
communication network cable to the terminal
block. (See Figure 3-2 for terminal location and Do not ground either shield at the network
Figure 3-3 for terminal identification). extender enclosure. Insulate the shields to
prevent shorting to the device housing or to any
See Table 3-8 to determine maximum wiring other conductor.
length.
4. Check ALL wiring to ensure that proper
COM 1 - Communication network connections: connections have been made.
Connect to COM 2 terminals of the next
device on the loop, A to A and B to B. 5. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
in good condition.
COM 2 - Communication network connections:
Connect to COM 1 terminals of the 6. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the
previous device on the loop, A to A and junction box cover with a thin coat of grease to
B to B. ease installation and ensure a watertight
enclosure.
24 VDC - Connect the "+" terminal to the positive
side of the 24 vdc power source. (Both Note
"+" terminals are connected internally.) The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease, available from Det-Tronics.
Connect the "–" terminal to the negative
side of the 24 vdc power source. (Both 7. Place the cover on the enclosure. Tighten only
"–" terminals are connected internally.) until snug. Do not over tighten.

TERMINAL NO. 1

1 12

A2021

Figure 3-2—Network Extender Wiring Terminal Location

15.1 3-10 95-8533


1 SHIELD

2 A COM 1

GND
3 B

11
12
4 SHIELD

13

10
14

9
8
+

7
5

6
5
4

3
6

2
1
24 VDC

7 –

8 +

9 SHIELD

A1870

10 A Figure 3-4—IDC Terminal Wiring Board Mounted in Six-Port


Junction Box
11 B COM 2
Wiring
12 SHIELD
A1947 1. Remove the cover from the device junction box.

2. Connect external system wiring to the appropriate


terminals on the terminal block. (See Figure 3-4
Figure 3-3—Network Extender Wiring Terminal Identification
for terminal block location and Figure 3-5 for
terminal identification). The input to the IDC
consists of one or more normally open switches
(momentary pushbuttons are not recommended),
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) with a 10K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in parallel
INSTALLATION across the furthest switch from the input.

IMPORTANT!
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit
(IDC) An EOL resistor must be installed on both IDC
inputs (including unused inputs). Wiring
impedance must not exceed 500 ohms.
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install the EQ22xxIDC Initiating Device Circuit.
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections have
been properly made.
Mounting
IMPORTANT!
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for Be sure that the keyed ribbon cable is properly
device dimensions.) connected to the terminal board.

warning! 4. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is


in good condition.
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
5. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the
applied.
junction box cover with a thin coat of grease to
ease installation and ensure a watertight
enclosure.

15.1 3-11 95-8533


Note Mounting
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
grease, available from Det-Tronics.
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
device dimensions.)
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Device Network Addresses” in this section.) Wiring

7. Place the cover on the junction box and tighten


WARNING!
only until snug. DO NOT over tighten.
The enclosure must be electrically connected to
earth ground.
IDC MANUAL PULL STATION
OR OTHER CONTACT DEVICE
1. Remove the enclosure cover from the device.
+ 1

CIRCUIT 1 EOL (10K)


2. Remove the communication module from the
– 2
junction box. Connect external wiring to the
appropriate points on the device terminal block.
+ 3
(See Figure 3-4 for terminal block location and
CIRCUIT 2 EOL (10K)
Figure 3-6 for terminal identification)
– 4

3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections


A 5
have been properly made.
COM 2
B 6
4. Inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is in
good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the

7 14
threads of the enclosure cover to ease both
COM SHIELD
installation and future removal of the cover.
8 13 –
24 VDC
Note
A 12 +
9
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
COM 1
grease available from Detector Electronics.
B 10 11 +
A1871

RELAY CONTACT
Figure 3-5—Terminal Configuration for IDC FOR MONITORING BATTERY.
CONTACT OPENS
WITH BATTERY TROUBLE CONDITION.
+ 3
68K OHM
INPUT RESISTOR
– 4
EQ22xxIDCGF series initiating device
circuit ground fault A 5
RELAY CONTACT
FOR MONITORING AC POWER.
CONTACT CLOSES
COM 2
The following paragraphs describe how to properly B
ON LOSS OF AC POWER.
6
install and configure the EQ22xxIDCGF Initiating
Device Circuit Ground Fault. 7 14 –
COM SHIELD

8 13 –
24 VDC

A 9 12 +
COM 1
B 10 11 +

B1922

NOTE: ENCLOSURE AND/OR MOUNTING BRACKET


MUST BE CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND.

Figure 3-6—Terminal Configuration for IDCGF

15.1 3-12 95-8533


Wiring
WARNING!
If the installation uses catalytic type combustible caution!
gas sensors, it is imperative that lubricants
containing silicone not be used, since they will The enclosure should be electrically connected
cause irreversible damage to the sensor. to earth ground.

5. Install the communication module in the device 1. Remove the cover from the device enclosure.
enclosure.
2. Remove the communication module from the
Note junction box. Connect external wiring to the
Be sure the ribbon cable is properly connected. appropriate terminals on device terminal block.
(See Figure 3-4 for terminal block location and
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting Figure 3-7 for terminal identification.) The input to
Device Network Addresses” in this section) the IDCSC consists of a normally open switch with
a 3.3k ohm series resistor, and a 10K ohm, 1/4
When configuring the EQ22xxIDCGF, its “device watt EOL resistor in parallel across the switch.
type” should be configured as an initiating device
circuit (IDC). Note
An EOL resistor must be installed on both IDCSC
Both inputs must be configured for a trouble inputs (including unused inputs). Wiring
condition. impedance must not exceed 500 ohms. A 3.3K
ohm resistor must be installed in series with the
Circuit 1 – “Open” indicates a –24 VDC ground switch. For correct operation, only one switch
fault condition. “Active” indicates a +24 per input can be connected.
VDC ground fault condition.
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections have
Circuit 2 – “Active” indicates a loss of AC input been properly made.
power.
“Open” indicates a loss of battery 4. Install the communication module in the device
power. enclosure.

7. Place the cover on the enclosure and tighten until 5. Inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is in
snug. DO NOT over tighten. good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
threads of the enclosure cover to ease both
installation and future removal of the cover.
EQ22xxIDCSC series initiating Device
Circuit Short Circuit Note
(Not FM Approved) The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease available from Detector Electronics.

The following paragraphs describe how to properly Note


install and configure the EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Be sure the ribbon cable is properly connected.
Device Circuit Short Circuit.
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Mounting Device Network Addresses” in this section.)

The device should be securely mounted to a vibration 7. Place the cover on the enclosure and tighten until
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for snug. Do not over tighten.
device dimensions.

15.1 3-13 95-8533


MANUAL PULL STATION
OR OTHER CONTACT DEVICE
Note
IDCSC For any selected enclosure, the enclosure must
conform to all applicable regulations and
+ 1
EOL (10K)
requirements.
CIRCUIT 1
– 3.3 K
2
NOTE
The Trouble signal must be located in an area
+ 3
EOL (10K)
where it is likely to be heard.
CIRCUIT 2
– 3.3 K
4
Classified locations require the appropriate hazardous
rated enclosure. It is recommended that operators/
A 5
switches be installed in the enclosure. This avoids
COM 2
the need to declassify the area in order to operate the
B 6
Controller. Regulations require that key switches be
installed for certain operations. An appropriate
7 14 –
window should be part of the enclosure in order to
COM SHIELDS
allow an operator to view the text display and LED
8 13 –
indicators.
24 VDC

A 9 12 +
Note
COM 1
If an enclosure does not have a keyed entry, a
B 10 11 +
C2076
special tool is required to gain entry into an
enclosure.
Figure 3-7—IDCSC Terminal Identification
Det-Tronics offers several approved (FM/CSA/ATEX/
CE) hazardous area enclosures that have Eagle
EQ3XXX CONTROLLER Quantum Premier equipment installed in the
INSTALLATION enclosure. Contact Det-Tronics for further information.

The following paragraphs describe how to properly


MOUNTING
install and configure the EQ3XXX Controller.
The Controller is designed for direct panel mounting
or DIN rail (optional) mounting. See “Specifications”
ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
section of this manual for mounting dimensions.
The Controller must be properly installed in a suitable
enclosure that is rated for the location. The enclosure Note
must provide space to install and wire the Controller Clips for DIN rail mounting are available, but
and must also provide for ground wire termination. must be specified at the time of ordering.
The enclosure must contain either a keyed lock or a
special tool to gain access into the enclosure. The Note
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range A minimum clearance of 4 inches between the
of the location plus the temperature rise of all Controller and nearby equipment is required to
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The provide room for wiring and ventilation.
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
is going to be installed.

NOTE SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD


The Controller and enclosure must be
A Serial Interface Board is available for the EQP
connected to earth ground.
Controller. See Figures 3-8A and 3-9 for details on
the electrical connections.
For ordinary locations when entry is required to
operate the equipment, the cabinet should be a
dead-front construction and 16-gauge cold-rolled ETHERNET INTERFACE BOARD
steel. The door lock system shall accept different
An Ethernet Interface Board is available for the EQP
keys for entry. An Authorized Persons key and a
Controller. See Figures 3-8B and 3-9 for details on
Person-in-charge key will allow entry into the cabinet.
the electrical connections.
The cabinet should contain a window to view the
Controller’s text display and LED indicators.

15.1 3-14 95-8533


WIRING Electrical Connections
Figure 3-8 shows the location of wiring connectors on
Power Wiring
the Controller module. Figure 3-9 identifies individual
terminals.
caution!
Input voltage at the Controller must be 18 vdc Connector P1, Terminals 1 to 4 —
minimum to ensure proper operation. 24 vdc Input Power
Connect the power supply to terminals 1 and 2 of the
It is important to consider both the wire gauge and the Controller. Terminals 3 and 4 must also be connected
distance from the Controller to the power supply. As to power.
the distance between the Controller and the power
supply increases, so must the diameter of the power When controller and power supplies are installed in
wiring in order to maintain a minimum of 18 vdc at the separate NRTL cabinets, two power cables from two
Controller. distribution circuits are required, so that if one is lost,
the controller will continue to operate and signal a
trouble condition. The power circuit must be
IMPORTANT! protected against physical damage.
To ensure proper operation of devices, the
Shields on power cables must be connected to
voltage input to the device (measured at the
chassis ground (earth).
device) must be within the range indicated for
that device in the "Specifications" section of this
manual.
P12: TERMINALS 66 TO 68 – PORT 4
RS-232 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE

P11: TERMINALS 63 TO 65 – PORT 3


P13: HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL) RS-232 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE
RS-232 (REDUNDANCY ONLY) OR S3 CONFIGURATION

P10: TERMINALS 60 TO 62 - PORT 2


RS-485 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE
68 66 65 63 62 60

SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD

DET-TRONICS
CONTROLNET ®
59

BNC CONNECTOR B P9: TERMINALS 57 TO 59


56 57

RS-232 S3 CONFIGURATION PORT


EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
P8: TERMINALS 54 TO 56 - PORT 1
CONTROLNET
Safety System Controller
54

RS-485 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE


BNC CONNECTOR A
53

Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr
P7: TERMINALS 48 TO 53
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence LON CONNECTIONS
48

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

F2105
1 4 5 12 13 20 21 32 33 44 45 47

P6: TERMINALS 45 TO 47
FAULT RELAY (NC CONTACT)

P5: TERMINALS 33 TO 44
RELAYS 5 TO 8

P4: TERMINALS 21 TO 32
RELAYS 1 TO 4

P3: TERMINALS 13 TO 20
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8

P2: TERMINALS 5 TO 12
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4

P1: TERMINALS 1 TO 4
24 VDC INPUT POWER

Figure 3-8A—Location of Wiring Terminals on EQP Controller with Serial Interface Board

15.1 3-15 95-8533


Port 4, ETHERNET, MODBUS TCP/IP MASTER/SLAVE

Port 3, ETHERNET, MODBUS TCP/IP MASTER/SLAVE


P13: HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL) or S3 CONFIGURATION
RS-232 (REDUNDANCY ONLY)

P10: TERMINALS 60 TO 62 - PORT 2


RS-485 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE
62 60

ETHERNET INTERFACE BOARD

DET-TRONICS
CONTROLNET ®

59
BNC CONNECTOR B P9: TERMINALS 57 TO 59

56 57
RS-232 S3 CONFIGURATION PORT
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
P8: TERMINALS 54 TO 56 - PORT 1
CONTROLNET
Safety System Controller

54
RS-485 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE
BNC CONNECTOR A

53
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr
P7: TERMINALS 48 TO 53
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence LON CONNECTIONS

48
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

A2632
1 4 5 12 13 20 21 32 33 44 45 47

P6: TERMINALS 45 TO 47
FAULT RELAY (NC CONTACT)

P5: TERMINALS 33 TO 44
RELAYS 5 TO 8

P4: TERMINALS 21 TO 32
RELAYS 1 TO 4

P3: TERMINALS 13 TO 20
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8

P2: TERMINALS 5 TO 12
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4

P1: TERMINALS 1 TO 4
24 VDC INPUT POWER

Figure 3-8B—Location of Wiring Terminals on EQP Controller with Ethernet Interface Board

15.1 3-16 95-8533


+ 1 48 SHIELD P2
P1
– 2 COM 1 49 1B
24 VDC INPUT POWER + 3 50 1A INPUT, + 5
P7
– 4 51 SHIELD LON

1+ 5 COM 2 52 2B
RESET*
1– 6 53 2A
COMMON, – 6
2+ 7 54 GND
ACKNOWLEDGE* P8
P2
2– 8 55 B RS-485
PORT 1
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4 3+ 9 56 A A2117
SILENCE*
3– 10 57 GND
P9
4+ 11 58 RxD RS-232 Figure 3-10—Unsupervised Input Wiring
INHIBIT ENABLE** CONFIG
4– 12 59 TxD PORT

5+ 13
ENTER*
5– 14
6+ 15
CANCEL* P4
16 SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD
6–
P3
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8 17
7+ 60 A COMMON 21 +
NEXT* P10
7– 18 61 B RS-485
PORT 2
8+ 19 62 GND
PREVIOUS* N. O. 22
8– 20 63 TxD
P11
1 C 21 64 RxD RS-232
PORT 3
1 NO 22 FIRE ALARM* 65 GND N. C. 23
1 NC 23 66 TxD
P12 A2118
2 C 24 67 RxD RS-232
PORT 4
2 NO 25 SUPERVISORY* 68 GND –

P4
2 NC 26
RELAYS 1 TO 4 P13
3 C 27 RS-232 - HSSL Figure 3-11—Unsupervised Relay Output
(Custom Connector,
3 NO 28 LOW GAS ALARM*
for Redundancy Only)
3 NC 29
4 C 30
ETHERNET INTERFACE BOARD
4 NO 31 HIGH GAS ALARM*

4 NC 32 60 A
P10
33 61 B RS-485
5 C
PORT 2
34 INHIBIT*
62 GND
5 NO

5 NC 35
ETHERNET
36 RJ45 PORT 3
6 C

6 NO 37 OUTPUT INHIBIT*

P5
6 NC 38
ETHERNET
RELAYS 5 TO 8 RJ45
7 C 39 PORT 4

7 NO 40 LON FAULT*

7 NC 41
P13
8 C 42 RS-232 - HSSL
(Custom Connector,
8 NO 43 BEEPER* for Redundancy Only)

8 NC 44
C 45
P6 * DIGITAL INPUTS AND RELAY OUTPUTS CAN BE
NO 46 CONFIGURED AS THE STATIC FUNCTION NAME (AS
TROUBLE RELAY
SHOWN) OR CAN BE USER DEFINED.
NC 47
H2104 ** INHIBIT ENABLE FOR SIL CONTROLLERS ONLY.

Figure 3-9—EQP Controller Terminal Identification

15.1 3-17 95-8533


Connector P2, Terminals 5 to12 — NOTE
Unsupervised Digital Input Channels 1 to 4 Refer to Figures 3-12A and 3-12B for location of
termination jumpers.
Connector P3, Terminals 13 to 20 —
Unsupervised Digital Input Channels 5 to 8
Jumper P24 – RS-485 Termination Jumper
See Figure 3-10 for example. Only channel 1 is shown
in Figure 3-10. The information is typical for channels 1-2 Unterminated
2-8. 2-3 Terminated 121 ohms (factory setting)
Transceiver input impedance: 68 kohm
Connector P4, Terminals 21 to 32 —
Unsupervised Relay Output Channels 1 to 4 Jumper P25 – LON COM 1 Termination
Connector P5, Terminals 33 to 44 — 1-2 COM 1 Terminated (factory setting)
Unsupervised Relay Output Channels 5 to 8 2-3 COM 1 Unterminated (Redundancy)
See Figure 3-11 for example. Only channel 1 is shown
in Figure 3-11. The information is typical for channels Jumper P26 – LON COM 2 Termination
2-8.
1-2 COM 2 Terminated (factory setting)
2-3 COM 2 Unterminated (Redundancy)
Note
Channel software configurations include all
panel indicator functions to automatically mimic Connector P8, Terminals 54, 55 & 56 , Port 1—
the controller front panel indicators. RS-485 Modbus RTU Master/Slave
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
Connector P6, Terminals 45, 46 & 47 —
parity check for the serial port, and Modbus device
Trouble Relay
address. Software selectable baud rates are 2400,
The Trouble relay is not configurable. In the normal 4800, 9600,19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
condition, the relay coil is energized, closing the N.O. Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
contact (terminals 45-46) and opening the N.C. The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
contact (terminals 45-47). The relay coil is
de-energized in the trouble condition. Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
54 — GND
Connector P7, Terminals 48 to 53 — 55 — B
LON Signaling Line Circuit Terminals 56 — A
The LON loop is wired so that the controller’s LON
COM 1 is connected to the field device’s COM 2 Connector P9, Terminals 57, 58 & 59 —
connection. The field device’s COM 1 is wired to the S3 Configuration Port
next device’s COM 2 connection. This continues
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
through the last field device on the loop. The last field
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate
device’s COM 1 is then wired back to the Controller’s
and parity check for the serial port. Software
COM 2 connection. LON A and B polarities must be
selectable baud rates are 2400, 4800, 9600,19200,
maintained throughout the loop (i.e., always wire A to
38400, 57600, and 115200 (factory default is 115200).
A and B to B between the devices).
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
Port Pinout (6-position connection terminal block)
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
48 — COM 1 shield connection
57 — GND
49 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
58 — RXD
50 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
59 — TXD
51 — COM 2 shield connection
52 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
53 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2

15.1 3-18 95-8533


68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60

P12 P11 P10


PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2

3 3

P3 P25
1 1

RS-232 Transmit LED (Amber)

RS-232 Receive LED (Green)

P3: RS-485 Ground Fault


MonitorJumper

RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber)


RS-232 Transmit LED
(Amber)
RS-485 Receive LED (Green)

P25: RS-485 Termination Jumper

RS-232 Receive LED (Green)


1 P

DET-TRONICS
O
®
RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber) P24 R
3 T
1
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
A B Safety System Controller
Channel RS-485 Termination Jumper
Indicators Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power
LON COM 2
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr
RS-485 Receive LED (Green) P26 Termination Jumper
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
1 3

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

1 3
P25
LON COM 1
Termination Jumper

Figure 3-12A—Location of Termination Jumpers, Communication Indicator LEDs, and Communication Ports
for Controller with Serial Interface Board

15.1 3-19 95-8533


62 61 60

RJ45 RJ45 P10


PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2

1 3 1 3
P6 P5

RS-232 Transmit LED (Amber)

RS-232 Receive LED (Green)

Ethernet Transmit LED (Amber)

Ethernet Receive LED (Green)

Ethernet Port Ready LED (Blue)


RS-232 Transmit LED
(Amber)
P6: RS-485 Termination Jumper

RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber)

RS-485 Receive LED (Green)

P5: RS-485 Ground Fault


Monitor Jumper

RS-232 Receive LED (Green)


1 P

DET-TRONICS
O
®
RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber) P24 R
3 T
1
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
A B Safety System Controller
Channel RS-485 Termination Jumper
Indicators Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power
LON COM 2
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr
RS-485 Receive LED (Green) P26 Termination Jumper
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
1 3

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

1 3
P25
LON COM 1
Termination Jumper

Figure 3-12B—Location of Termination Jumpers, Communication Indicator LEDs, and Communication Ports
for Controller with Ethernet Interface Board

15.1 3-20 95-8533


Connector P10, Terminals 60, 61 & 62, Port 2– CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION
RS-485 Modbus RTU Master/Slave
Controller to Controller Communication (SLC485)
Configuration data downloaded into the controller with Signaling Line Circuit Classification
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate, Class B or X, per NFPA 72
parity check for the serial port, and Modbus device
To connect up to twelve controllers together and be
address. Software selectable baud rates are
able to transfer safety information between the
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 and 230400.
controllers, the communication link must be classified
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
as a signaling line circuit per NFPA 72. With the Serial
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Interface Board, Port 2 (plug 10) is a RS-485 serial
connection that is ground fault monitored.
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
60 — A To meet the signaling line circuit (Class B or Class X)
61 — B requirements, the following must be configured for
62 — GND correct operation:
• All controllers must have the same type Interface
Serial Interface Board Jumpers Board (Ethernet or Serial) installed.
Jumper P25 – RS-485 Termination Jumper, Port 2
CAUTION
1-2 Terminated 121 ohms (factory setting) When using the Ethernet Interface Board,
2-3 Unterminated controllers communicating over P10, Port 2 -
Transceiver input impedance: 68 kohm RS-485 are required to be located within the
same room or be wired in conduit within 20 feet
Jumper P3 – RS-485 Ground Fault Monitor, Port 2
(6 meters) for signalling line transient protection.
1-2 Enabled
2-3 Disabled (factory setting)
• The Termination jumper P28 must be set to
Terminate (position 1-2) on all controllers.
Ethernet Interface Board Jumpers
• The Ground Fault Monitor jumper P29 must be set to
Jumper P6 – RS-485 Termination Jumper, Port 2 Enabled (position 1-2) on all controllers.
1-2 Terminated 121 ohms (factory setting) • For Class X, Connect terminals A (# 56) and B (# 55)
2-3 Unterminated between the controllers. Connect terminal A (# 60) and
Transceiver input impedance: 68 kohm B (# 61) between controllers using a different cable route.
Connect GND (# 54) to GND (# 62) on each controller.
Jumper P5 – RS-485 Ground Fault Monitor, Port 2
• For Class B, connect terminals A (terminal number
1-2 Enabled
60) and B (terminal number 61) between the
2-3 Disabled (factory setting)
controllers. The GND (terminal number 62) must not
be connected.
Use Port 2 to pass safety critical information between
controllers. Ensure that Ground Fault Monitoring is
See Figure 3-13A and 3-13B for wiring details.
enabled. User logic can pass all alarm, trouble, and
supervisory information between the controllers.
Note 1: 56.7 kbps minimum and 115.2 kbps maximum
Watchdog timers must be implemented in user logic
baud rate required for proper communication.
to verify the integrity of the SLC. Consult the local
Note 2: Consult the factory for configuration set-up.
authority having jurisdiction for annunciation
Note 3: Maximum SLC485 length over copper not to
requirements.
exceed 1000 meters.

15.1 3-21 95-8533


TO
ADDITIONAL
CONTROLLER(S)

68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60

GND B A GND B A

P12 P11 P10 P12 P11 P10


PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2 PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2

3 3 3 3

P3 P25 P3 P25
1 1 1 1

P3: RS-485 Ground Fault P3: RS-485 Ground Fault


Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2 Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2

P25: RS-485 Termination Jumper, P25: RS-485 Termination Jumper,


Position 1 & 2 Position 1 & 2

DET-TRONICS DET-TRONICS
® ®

56 56
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
55 55
A B Safety System Controller 54 A B Safety System Controller 54
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

E2276

Figure 3-13A—Controller to Controller Communication with Class A Signaling Line Circuit Classification per NFPA 72,
for Controllers with Serial Interface Board

TO
ADDITIONAL
CONTROLLER(S)

62 61 60 62 61 60

GND B A GND B A

RJ45 RJ45 P10 RJ45 RJ45 P10


PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2 PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
P6 P5 P6 P5

P6: RS-485 Termination Jumper, P6: RS-485 Termination Jumper,


Position 1 & 2 Position 1 & 2

P5: RS-485 Ground Fault P5: RS-485 Ground Fault


Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2 Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2

DET-TRONICS DET-TRONICS
® ®

56 56
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
55 55
A B Safety System Controller 54 A B Safety System Controller 54
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

A2633

Figure 3-13B—Controller to Controller Communication with Class A Signaling Line Circuit Classification per NFPA 72,
for Controllers with Ethernet Interface Board

15.1 3-22 95-8533


Table 3-9—Approved Supported Media Converters for Fiber Optic Link The media converter can be connected to either of the
Manufacturer Model Number Description EQP controller RS-485 communication ports (Port 1 or
Port 2). Figure 3-14 illustrates a typical Class B wiring
Moxa RS-485 to Single-mode
TCF-142-S connection (single mode) between two EQP controllers
(www.moxa.com) Fiber Optical Converter
in a redundant configuration using Port 1. Note: If Port 2
PSI-MOS- RS-485 to Multi-mode is preferred, the Serial Interface Board must be
Phoenix Contact
RS485W2/FO Fiber Optical Converter
purchased.

Figure 3-15 shows a typical Class X wiring connection


Controller to Controller with Fiber Optic Link, Signal (single mode).
Line Circuit Classification Class B or X per NFPA 72.
Figure 3-16 shows a typical Class X wiring connection
Up to twelve EQP controllers (single or redundant for Phoenix (multi mode).
pair) can be inter-connected via a fiber optic link. This
communication link is classified as a signaling line The maximum distance of a particular optic link given
circuit per NFPA 72 to allow safety information to be the optical budget is calculated as:
transferred between controllers.
Fiber Length = [Optical budget] – [Link Loss]
The fiber optic link incorporates media converters to [Fiber Loss / km]
convert from copper to fiber optic cable. The converter
must be located in the same cabinet as the controller where link loss includes number of end connectors,
and cannot use ground fault monitoring. The approved splices and safety margin.
supported converters are shown in Table 3-9. The link Example: 10 db link budget
budget for the listed fiber optic converters is 10dB. Cable Attenuation: 0.4 db / km
2 connectors: (1 each end) with 0.5 db ea.
Warning Safety margin: 3.0 db max
The fiber converters must be mounted inside the
same enclosure as the controllers to conform to NFPA Max. Distance = 10 – (2 x 0.5) – 3.0 = 15 km
72. 0.4

For more information regarding selection and


installation of fiber optic media, please contact
Det-Tronics customer service.

EQP CONTROLLER No. 1 EQP CONTROLLER No. 3


SINGLE MODE

56 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 56


A A
PORT 1 PORT 1
B 55 55 B
RS-485 RS-485
GND 54 Rx Tx Rx Tx 54 GND

T+ T+

T– T–

R+D+ R+D+
Moxa Moxa
R–D– R–D–
TCF-142-S TCF-142-S
Tx Tx

Rx Rx

EQP CONTROLLER No. 2 GND GND EQP CONTROLLER No. 4

A 56 56 A
PORT 1 PORT 1
B 55 55 B
RS-485 RS-485
GND 54 54 GND

B2328

Figure 3-14—Controller to Controller NFPA 72 Approved Fiber Optic Link, Class B

15.1 3-23 95-8533


SINGLE MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE

Rx Tx Rx Tx

T+ T+

T– T–

R+D+ Moxa Moxa R+D+ EQP CONTROLLER No. 2


EQP CONTROLLER No. 1
TCF-142-S TCF-142-S
R–D– R–D–

A 60 Tx Tx 60 A
PORT 2 PORT 2
B 61 Rx Rx 61 B
RS-485 RS-485
GND 62 GND GND 62 GND

SINGLE MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE

Rx Tx Rx Tx

A 56 56 A

PORT 1 T+ T+ PORT 1
B 55 55 B
RS-485 RS-485
T– T–
GND 54 54 GND
R+D+ Moxa Moxa R+D+
TCF-142-S TCF-142-S
R–D– R–D– B2371

Tx Tx

Rx Rx

GND GND

Figure 3-15—Single Mode Controller to Controller NFPA 72 Approved Fiber Optic Link, Class X

EQP CONTROLLER No. 1 TROUBLE INPUT TROUBLE INPUT EQP CONTROLLER No. 3
TO EQP SYSTEM TO EQP SYSTEM
MULTI MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A 60 60 A
PORT 2 PORT 2
RS-485 B 61 61 B RS-485

GND 62 ATD ARD BTD BRD BTD BRD ATD ARD 62 GND

D(P) D(P)
Phoenix Phoenix
D(N) PSI-MOS- PSI-MOS-
D(N)
RS485W2/FO RS485W2/FO

EQP CONTROLLER No. 2 GND GND EQP CONTROLLER No. 4

A 60 60 A
PORT 2 PORT 2
RS-485 B 61 61 B RS-485

GND 62 62 GND

B2372

Figure 3-16—Multi-Mode Controller to Controller NFPA 72 Approved Fiber Optic Link, Class X

15.1 3-24 95-8533


Connector P11, Terminals 63, 64 & 65, Port 3– RJ45, Port 4
(Serial Interface Board only) (Ethernet Interface Board only)
RS-232 Modbus RTU Master/Slave Ethernet Modbus TCP Client/Server
or S3 Configuration Port (Non-Isolated)
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
Configuration data downloaded into the controller configures the Ethernet interface IP address, subnet
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate, mask, gateway, and local port number. This port may
parity check and MODBUS device address for the be used as a Modbus TCP Client or a Modbus TCP
serial port. Software selectable baud rates are Server. EQP controllers come from the factory with
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400. the following default values for Port 4:
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit. Port 4 IP Address 192.168.127.252
Port 4 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
63 — TXD
NOTE
64 — RXD
Maximum Modbus update time per port is 250
65 — GND
mSec.

RJ45, Port 3
Connector P13 —
(Ethernet Interface Board only)
RS-232 High Speed Serial Port
Ethernet Modbus TCP Client/Server
or S3 Configuration Port (Non-Isolated) This port is dedicated to inter-controller connection
required for redundancy, and is not available for any
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
other use. This port is automatically configured.
configures the Ethernet interface IP address, subnet
mask, gateway, and local port number. This port may
be used as a Modbus TCP Client or a Modbus TCP CONFIGURATION
Server. This port may also be used as an alternate S3
Software Defined Addresses
configuration port. EQP controllers come from the
factory with the following default values for Port 3: Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3) is
programmed with the addresses that are assigned to
Port 3 IP Address 192.168.127.251 the controller when the configuration file is
Port 3 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000 downloaded into the controller. Addresses define and
configure the Controller’s LON address, Modbus slave
address, and the ControlNet option board address.
NOTE Each device on the LON must be assigned a unique
Maximum Modbus update time per port is 250 tag number. This tag number must include zone
mSec. designation, which will be shown on the Controller's
display when the device is in alarm.
Connector P12, Terminals 66, 67 & 68, Port 4–
(Serial Interface Board only)
RS-232 Modbus RTU Master/Slave (Non-Isolated)
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
parity check and MODBUS device address for the
serial port. Software selectable baud rates are
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400.
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.

Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)


66 — TXD
67 — RXD
68 — GND

15.1 3-25 95-8533


EQ3XXX REDUNDANT CONTROLLER WIRING
INSTALLATION The redundant controllers are wired the same as a
simplex controller except for the LON wiring and the
The redundant controllers must be purchased with the
dedicated high-speed serial link, which are defined
following options for correct installation:
below. Refer to EQ3XXX Controller Installation for
• Either Ethernet or Serial Interface Board
general installation details.
• High-speed serial cable
• LON termination modules (2).
LON WIRING

ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS The LON must be connected to both redundant


controllers to ensure correct operation. Two LON
The redundant controllers must be located next to Termination Modules are required for the installation
each other in the same enclosure (4 ft. interconnecting as shown in Figure 3-17.
cable).

HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL)


MOUNTING
The redundant controllers are connected together by
The controllers are designed for direct panel mounting a dedicated high-speed serial link. This link is a pre-
or DIN rail mounting. See “Specifications” section of fabricated cable that has a custom connector for
this manual for mounting dimensions. ease of use. Redundant controllers are automatically
addressed with the HSSL cable. One end of the
cable is labeled Primary. The primary controller takes
address 1, while the secondary controller is address
2. The significance this has for the user is that the
primary is the default master when both controllers
LON are powered-up at the same time.
EQP TERMINATION
CONTROLLER MODULE

A 53 3 A 6 CONFIGURATION
COM 2 TO
COM 2 B 52 2 B 5 FIELD
DEVICES S3 Configuration
S 51 1 S 4
The S3 configuration software is used to configure the
A 50 redundant controllers. A check box on the controller
COM 1 B 49
configuration screen must be enabled and
downloaded to the controllers.
S 48

IMPORTANT
If the controllers have not been configured for
redundancy via the S3 configuration software,
redundancy will not function.
EQP
CONTROLLER
Controller Addresses
A 53
The LON addresses are pre-determined and cannot
COM 2 B 52
LON be adjusted. Address 1 and 2 have been reserved for
TERMINATION
S 51 MODULE a redundant controller configuration.
A 50 3 A 6

2 B 5
COM 1 TO
FIELD
Modbus
COM 1 B 49
DEVICES
S 48 1 S 4 Modbus ports on each controller share the serial
C2274
settings including baud rate and address. Controllers
NOTE: LON TERMINATION JUMPERS P25 AND P26 (SEE FIGURE 3-12)
in standby mode don’t respond to or issue Modbus
MUST BE IN POSITION 2 AND 3 FOR REDUNDANT CONFIGURATION
(ON BOTH CONTROLLERS).
messages. This allows for transparent switching on a
multi-drop network. If RS-232 is used, a relay
Figure 3-17— LON Connection for Redundant EQP Controllers switching mechanism can be used.

15.1 3-26 95-8533


ControlNet MOUNTING
The ControlNet interface on each controller will have Mount the power supply monitor in a Nationally
different addresses. This allows both controllers to Recognized Test Laborator y (NRTL) labeled
reside on the same ControlNet network at the same enclosure. Refer to the “Specifications” section for
time. The primary controller uses the configured mounting dimensions.
address while the standby assumes an address 1
higher than the primary controller. Application logic in
WIRING
the attached PLC must be used to determine which
controller has the correct output information.
Information coming from the PLC should be written to caution!
both Premier Controllers.
The power supply should be properly connected
to an earth ground! A ground wire MUST be
Ethernet connected to the power supply units’s case
ground!
The Ethernet interface ports on each controller will all
NOTE
have unique IP addresses. This allows both
The Power Supply Monitor uses two of the four
controllers to reside on the same Ethernet network at
DIP switches to select an appropriate fault level
the same time. The primary and secondary controller
for the installation. See Figure 3-18. The unit will
IP addresses for ports 3 and 4 are part of the
fault when the batteries source a current level
configuration data. During the configuration
higher than the threshold for 20 seconds. The
download, the primary controller assigns the primary
fault will clear when the current drops to half the
IP address to itself and passes the secondary IP
level for 20 seconds. The current level selection
address on to the secondary controller. Controllers in
is based on the minimum current draw of the
standby mode do not respond to Modbus TCP
attached equipment. The selected value must
messages. Ethernet applications need to redirect to
be less than the actual minimum current draw
the alternate IP address when controller switchovers
for the system.
occur.
1. Verify that the input source is the same voltage
and frequency as that marked on the nameplate
EQ21XXPS SERIES POWER SUPPLY of the power supply.
AND POWER SUPPLY MONITOR
INSTALLATION 2. Verify that transformer taps are set for the correct
a.c. input. (Input tap setting is located inside the
power supply enclosure.)
WARNING!
ALWAYS follow all safety notes and instructions 3. Verify that the supply power wire size and fusing
when installing power supply or batteries! are adequate for the current indicated on the
power supply nameplate.
WARNING!
Note
Make sure a.c. power is OFF at main a.c. Consult the power supply manufacturer’s
breaker before beginning power supply instruction manual provided with the support
installation! documentation received with the Eagle Quantum
System.
IMPORTANT!
Power supplies require unrestricted air flow for Note
proper cooling. Required Overload Current is usually equal to
15% of the nominal rating.

15.1 3-27 95-8533


J1: POWER AND LON WIRING LON ADDRESS SWITCHES J3: AC INPUT

1 TERMINAL NO. 1
TERMINAL J2-1 TO
TERMINAL B

TERMINAL J2-2 TO SWITCH NO. 1


TERMINAL C
+ –

J2 4 3 2 1

1
YELLOW LED

TERMINAL NO. 1 RED LED

GREEN LED

C1949
0.0005 OHM SHUNT

J2: BATTERY TEST POINTS TERMINAL NO. 1 ALARM CURRENT LEVEL SWITCH SETTINGS

POWER SUPPLY MONITOR TERMINAL "C" ALARM LEVEL 1 2 3 4


PC BOARD ASSEMBLY
TERMINAL "B" 200 mA O O – –

400 mA X O – –

NOTE: J2 TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ARE CONNECTED TO J1 TERMINALS 7 AND 8 INTERNALLY 800 mA O X – –


X = CLOSED
ON THE PC BOARD. J1 TERMINALS 7 AND 8 ARE ALSO CONNECTED TO THE 2 AMP X X – – O = OPEN
BATTERY CIRCUIT BREAKER VIA POWER DIST CKT.

Figure 3-18—Power Supply Monitor Terminal and Switch Location

4. Connect external wiring to the appropriate points


on Power Supply. Refer to Figure 3-18 for terminal
1 SHIELD
block locations and Figures 3-19 and 3-20 for
terminal identification. Connect the 24 vdc power
2 A COM 1 wires and the LON network cable to the appropriate
points on J1. (Redundant “+”, “–” and shield
3 B
terminals are connected internally.) Do not ground
any shield at the monitor / power distribution
4 SHIELD
cabinet. Insulate the shields to prevent shorting to
the device housing or to any other conductor.
5 +

5. Connect a two wire cable between the AC input of


6 – the power supply and terminals 1 and 4 on J3, the
24 VDC
AC input terminal block on the power supply
7 – monitor. See Figure 3-20.

8 +

9 SHIELD 1 AC INPUT 120 / 240 VAC

10 A 2 NOT USED

11 B COM 2 3 NOT USED

12 SHIELD 4 AC INPUT 120 / 240 VAC


A1947
A1950

Figure 3-19—J1: Power and LON Wiring Terminal Figure 3-20—J3: AC Input Terminal

15.1 3-28 95-8533


POWER SUPPLY MONITOR 12
TERMINAL J1
See Note 10 11
10
1 9
AC MONITOR 8
4 7
See Note 4
6
5
4
C 3
2
B 1

AC POWER H – –
24 VDC
See Notes 1 & 3 N OUTPUT
G + + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –

+ POWER DIST CKT #2 –

+ POWER DIST CKT #3 –

AC BREAKER DC BREAKER + POWER DIST CKT #4 –


BATTERY
CIRCUIT
BREAKER

EQ21XXPS POWER SUPPLY See Note 3


(See Note 9)
NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET

NOTES
1. AC INPUT SELECTABLE (THROUGH THE OIS) FOR 120 / 208 / 240 VAC.
2. BATTERY SIZE CALCULATED BASED ON SYSTEM LOAD.
See Note 6 See Note 2 3. CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL PROTECT AGAINST EXCESSIVE CURRENT LOAD.
4. REMOVAL OF TERMINAL PLUG WITH POWER APPLIED TO TERMINALS B AND C
– + – + WILL DAMAGE POWER SUPPLY MONITOR.
5. NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET IS KEY LOCKED ENCLOSURE.
12 VDC 12 VDC 6. DASH LINES DENOTE PROTECTION AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMAGE.
7. ANY PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY UNITS MAY BE INSTALLED
EXTERNALLY TO THE NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET, PROVIDED THEY ARE
PROTECTED AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMAGE. ALL DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUITS
E1951 BACKUP BATTERIES AND CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY UNITS
AND THE NTRL DISTRIBUTION CABINET SHALL ALSO BE PROTECTED AGAINST
PHYSICAL DAMAGE.
8. SUPERVISION (SINGLE OPENS & GROUNDS) OF THE INTERCONNECTIONS
BETWEEN POWER SUPPLY (24 VDC OUTPUT) TO NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET
AND BACKUP BATTERIES TO NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET IS PERFORMED BY
EQ2100PSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR.
9. THE CIRCUIT DISCONNECTING MEANS (AC & DC BREAKERS) SHALL BE
ACCESSIBLE ONLY TO AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL.
10. AC WIRING CABLE MUST BE ≤20 FEET IN CONDUIT.

Figure 3-21— Wiring Connections for a Power Supply Monitor, EQ21XXPS Series Power Supply and Backup Batteries

6. Connect the “B” terminal on the power supply 9. Set the device network address for the power
monitor to the negative (–) side of the backup supply monitor.
battery. Connect a correctly sized circuit breaker in
the battery circuit as shown in Figure 3-21. The NOTE
circuit breaker must be rated between 130% and For additional information, refer to the power
250% of the total load. supply manufacturer’s instruction manual
provided with the support documentation
7. Connect the “C” terminal on the power supply received with the Eagle Quantum Premier
monitor to the negative (–) side of the power supply. system.

8. Wire the power distribution circuit breakers to the output


STARTUP
of the power supply. Circuit breaker ratings must be
between 130% and 250% of the full load rating.
Turn on the power supply and allow the voltage to
stabilize at 27 volts before closing the circuit to the
battery.

15.1 3-29 95-8533


EQP2XX0PS(–X) POWER SUPPLIES
1 CURRENT SENSE +
AND REDUNDANCY MODULE
INSTALLATION
2 CURRENT SENSE –
WARNING!
3 BATTERY – ALWAYS follow all safety notes and instructions
when installing power supply or module!
4 BATTERY +
A1952
WARNING!
Figure 3-22—J2: Battery Test Points
Make sure a.c. power is OFF at main a.c. breaker
before beginning power supply installation!
MEASURING BATTERY VOLTAGE AND CHARGING
CURRENT
IMPORTANT!
Measure the battery voltage at terminals 3 and 4 of Power supplies require unrestricted air flow for
terminal block J2. See Figure 3-18 and 3-22. proper cooling.

To measure the battery charging current, connect a


digital voltmeter to terminals 1 and 2 of terminal block
MOUNTING
J2. The voltmeter will read 1 millivolt (0.001 volt) for each
2 amperes of current. Mount the power supply and Redundancy Module in a
Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) labeled
Current in Amperes = Meter reading in millivolts x 2 enclosure. Refer to the “Specifications” section for
mounting dimensions. Refer to power supply and
Example: A reading of 50 millivolts indicates a charging module manufacturer's instruction manual provided with
current of 100 amperes. support documentation received with the EQP system
for additional installation details and instructions.

WIRING

caution!
The power supply should be properly connected to
an earth ground! A ground wire MUST be connected
to the power supply units’s ground terminal!

1. Connect external wiring to the appropriate points


on Power Supplies.
Refer to Figure 3-23A for terminal locations for
EQP21X0PS(-X).
Refer to Figure 3-23B for terminal locations for
EQP2410PS(-P) Converter.
Refer to Figure 3-23C for terminal locations for
EQP2120PS(-X) with EQP2410PS(-P) Converter.

2. Connect the 24 VDC output to the Redundancy


Module. (Redundant “+” and “–” power supply
terminals are connected internally.)

15.1 3-30 95-8533


NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET

CB
AC POWER L –
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N
OUTPUT
G +
+

POWER SUPPLY

CB
– –
AC POWER L
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N
OUTPUT 1
G +
IN OUT + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –
+
2

POWER SUPPLY + POWER DIST CKT #2 –

REDUNDANCY
+ POWER DIST CKT #3 –
MODULE
+ POWER DIST CKT #4 –

D2445

NOTES: 1. AC INPUT IS AUTO-SELECTABLE FOR 120–220 VAC, 60/50 Hz (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED).


2. PRIMARY SOURCE OF INPUT SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO ONE POWER SUPPLY AND SECONDARY SOURCE IS
CONNECTED TO THE OTHER.
3. A MAXIMUM OF 8 REDUNDANT PAIRS CAN BE CONNECTED TO INPUT AC POWER.
4. THE SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONTINUOUSLY POWERED.
5. EQP CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS AC-DC POWER SUPPLIES AND REDUNDANCY MODULE.

Figure 3-23A—Wiring Connections for an EQP21X0PS(-X) Power Supply (Typical)

NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET

CB –
AC POWER L
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N OUTPUT
+
G
+

EQP2110PS(–P) POWER SUPPLY

– –
CB
24 VDC –
DC POWER +
OUTPUT 1
See Notes 1 & 2 – +
IN OUT + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –
+
2

EQP2410PS(–P) CONVERTER + POWER DIST CKT #2 –

REDUNDANCY
+ POWER DIST CKT #3 –
MODULE
+ POWER DIST CKT #4 –

E2543

NOTES: 1. AC INPUT IS AUTO-SELECTABLE FOR 120–220 VAC, 60/50 Hz. BOTH AC AND DC INPUTS ARE CUSTOMER SUPPLIED.
2. PRIMARY SOURCE OF INPUT SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO AC POWER SUPPLY AND SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONNECTED
TO DC CONVERTER.
3. A MAXIMUM OF 8 REDUNDANT PAIRS CAN BE CONNECTED TO INPUT AC/DC POWER.
4. THE SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONTINUOUSLY POWERED.
5. EQP CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS AC-DC POWER SUPPLY, DC-DC CONVERTER, AND
REDUNDANCY MODULE.

Figure 3-23B—Wiring Connections for an EQP2110PS(-P) Power Supply with EQP2410PS(-P) Converter (Typical)

15.1 3-31 95-8533


NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET

CB –
AC POWER L
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N OUTPUT 1
+
G IN OUT
+

EQP2120PS(–X) POWER SUPPLY


REDUNDANCY
MODULE

– –
CB
24 VDC –
DC POWER +
OUTPUT 1 +
See Notes 1 & 2 – +
IN OUT + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –
+
2

EQP2410PS(–P) CONVERTER + POWER DIST CKT #2 –

REDUNDANCY
+ POWER DIST CKT #3 –
MODULE
+ POWER DIST CKT #4 –

+ 24 VDC –
OUTPUT
– +
+

EQP2410PS(–P) CONVERTER
A2566

NOTES: 1. AC INPUT IS AUTO-SELECTABLE FOR 120–220 VAC, 60/50 Hz. BOTH AC AND DC INPUTS ARE CUSTOMER SUPPLIED.
2. PRIMARY SOURCE OF INPUT SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO AC POWER SUPPLY AND SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONNECTED
TO DC CONVERTER.
3. A MAXIMUM OF 4 REDUNDANT PAIRS CAN BE CONNECTED TO INPUT AC/DC POWER.
4. THE SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONTINUOUSLY POWERED.
5. EQP CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS AC-DC POWER SUPPLY, DC-DC CONVERTER, AND
REDUNDANCY MODULE.

Figure 3-23C—Wiring Connections for One EQP2120PS(-X) Power Supply with Two EQP2410PS(-P) Converters (Typical)

3. To ensure compliance with NFPA 72, primary and No supervision is necessary, since the EDIO or
secondary power supplies shall be monitored for IDC module must be installed in the same
the presence of voltage at the point of connection cabinet with EQP21X0PS and EQP2410PS.
to the system. Connect the power supply unit for
preferred preventive function monitoring. Refer to
For USCG Approved System monitoring details, refer to
Figure 3-24 for an example of power supply
Appendix D.
relays wired in series for power monitoring.
NOTE
note
For additional information, refer to the power
Contacts are closed during normal operation.
supply manufacturer’s documents provided with
The circuit shall be wired to an input on the EQP
the support documentation received with the
system (EDIO or IDC). In Logic, the selected
Eagle Quantum Premier system.
input must be inverted and used to activate an
alarm trigger gate, which initiates a fault
message on the Controller and activates the fault
relay output.

To EDIO or IDC

PS 1 PS PS PS n
L PHOENIX –
L PHOENIX –
L PHOENIX –
L PHOENIX –
QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS –
N N N N
+ + + +
DC + DC + DC + DC +
13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK
D2438

Figure 3-24—Power Supply and Converter Relays Wired in Series for Trouble Monitoring (up to 16 Power Supplies/Converters)

15.1 3-32 95-8533


STARTUP ENHANCED DISCRETE INPUT/
Turn on the power supply and allow the voltage to OUTPUT (EDIO) MODULE
stabilize. Verify the output voltage and adjust as INSTALLATION
needed. Refer to "EQP2XX0PS(–X) Power Supplies" All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
in the Specifications section of this manual. connectors furnished with the module. Refer to Figure
3-25 for identification of module wiring terminals.

IMPORTANT! Connector P1, Terminals 1 to 6


24 Vdc Power Input
The output voltage is adjustable. An even Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
current distribution must be ensured by 2. If additional terminals are required for powering
precisely setting all power supply units that are other devices, these devices should be connected to
operated in parallel to the same output voltage terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to
±10 mV. terminals 3 and 6 — chassis (earth) ground terminals.
Total output current should be limited to 10 amperes.

IMPORTANT! Connector P2, Terminals 1 to 6


LON/SLC Signaling Circuit Terminals
To ensure symmetrical current distribution it is Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON/SLC.
recommended that all cable connections from all 1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
power supply units/diode redundancy modules 2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
to the power distribution bus are the same 4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
length and have the same cross section. 5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
3, 6 — shield connection

Connector P3, Terminals 1 to 12


Terminals A,B & C
Channels 1 to 4 Input / Output Terminals
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal
descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each
diagram. The information is typical for channels 2-8.

EQ3730EDIO
COMMON C 24
IN–/OUT+ B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM CLASS A
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE CHANNEL 7
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20 CHANNEL 7


LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
IN–/OUT+ B 17 CHANNEL 6
+ SUPPLY A 16
CLASS A
CHANNEL 5
COMMON C 15
IN–/OUT+ B 14 CHANNEL 5
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
IN–/OUT+ B 11 CHANNEL 4
+ SUPPLY A 10
CLASS A
CHANNEL 3
COMMON C 9
IN–/OUT+ B 8 CHANNEL 3
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + IN–/OUT+ B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC CLASS A
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1
+ 1 + COMMON C 3

POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2 CHANNEL 1


+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. A2287

Figure 3-25—EDIO Module Wiring Terminals

15.1 3-33 95-8533


Connector P4, Terminals 13 to 24 COMMON C 3
Terminals A, B & C
Channels 5 to 8 Input / Output Terminals
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal IN– / OUT+ B 2

descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each + SUPPLY A 1


diagram. The information is typical for channels 2-8. C2090

Figure 3-26—Unsupervised Input Configuration


Unsupervised Input
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-26. COMMON C 3

EOL
RESISTOR
The input to the EDIO consists of one or more normally 10 K Ω

open or normally closed switches. An EOL resistor is IN– / OUT+ B 2

not required. + SUPPLY A 1


C2091

Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal. Figure 27—Supervised Input Configuration – Class B

Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision


COMMON C 6
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring,
see Figure 3-27. For Class A wiring, see Figure 3-28. IN– / OUT+ B 5
Note that two channels are used for one circuit when
using Class A wiring. + SUPPLY A 4

COMMON C 3
The input to the EDIO module consists of one or more EOL
normally open switches, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt RESISTOR
10 K Ω
EOL resistor in parallel across the last switch. IN– / OUT+ B 2

Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal. B2291


+ SUPPLY A 1

Figure 3-28—Supervised Input Configuration – Class A


Supervised Input Open and Short Circuit Supervision
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring, COMMON C 3
see Figure 3-29. For Class A wiring, see Figure 3-30. INLINE
RESISTOR EOL
Note that two channels are used for one circuit when 3.3 K Ω RESISTOR
10 K Ω
using Class A wiring. Both wiring configurations
IN– / OUT+ B 2
provide indication of open and short circuit fault.
+ SUPPLY A 1
C2092
The input to the EDIO module consists of normally
open switches, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor Figure 3-29—Supervised Input Configuration
for Opens and Shorts – Class B
in parallel across the return channel, and a 3.3 K ohm,
1/4 watt resistor in series with each switch.
COMMON C 6
NOTE
If using more than one switch, the first active
condition (switch closed) must be latched. Any INLINE
IN– / OUT+ B 5
subsequent closed switch will indicate a short RESISTOR
3.3 K Ω
circuit fault condition. + SUPPLY A 4

COMMON C 3
Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal.
EOL
RESISTOR

Input — Deluge and Pre-Action 10 K Ω

IN– / OUT+ B 2
The initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge and
pre-action system configuration must use Class A wiring + SUPPLY A 1
or be wired within 20 feet and in conduit from the EDIO. B2292

Figure 3-30—Supervised Input Configuration


for Opens and Shorts – Class A

15.1 3-34 95-8533


Two-Wire Smoke Detectors

The EDIO supports 2-wire devices from Kidde-Fenwal


and Apollo. Figure 3-31 shows the wiring for Apollo
detectors connected to EDIO Channel 1 through
terminals 1 and 2.

Figure 3-32 shows the typical wiring for Kidde-Fenwal


detectors connected to the EDIO through Channel 1
using terminals 1 and 2.

The EDIO supports either brand of detection products,


however, mixing brands is not supported on either a
single channel or module.

important
No more than 15 devices can be connected per
channel.

IN IN IN
+ SUPPLY A 1 L1 -R L1 -R L1 -R
EOL
RESISTOR
5KΩ
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
OUT OUT OUT

IN–/OUT+ B 2 A2283

COMMON C 3 UNUSED Figure 3-31—Apollo 2-Wire Devices

+ SUPPLY A 1

1 2 1 2 1 2

EOL
RESISTOR
3 3 5KΩ 3

7 6 7 6 7 6

IN–/OUT+ B 2 A2284

COMMON C 3 UNUSED Figure 3-32—Kidde-Fenwal 2-Wire Devices

Unsupervised Output
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-33. COMMON C 3

No connection should be made to “+ Supply”


terminal. IN– / OUT+ B 2

+ SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED


TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
A2321 WITHIN THE EDIO MODULE.

Figure 3-33—Unsupervised Output Configuration

15.1 3-35 95-8533


Supervised Output—
Notification Supervised for Open & Short Circuits COMMON C 3
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
EOL
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring, RESISTOR
refer to Figure 3-34. 10 K Ω

IN– / OUT+ B 2

For Class A wiring, refer to Figure 3-35. Note that two + SUPPLY A 1
channels are used for one output circuit.

The output of the EDIO module supervises the Figure 3-34—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)—
notification circuit by reversing the polarity of the Class B
monitoring circuit. Polarity must be observed when
connecting the notification device. It is essential to
utilize a notification device approved for fire alarm COMMON C 6

notification. These devices are polarized and would


not require the use of an external diode for the
supervision of the circuit. Wire one or more notification IN– / OUT+ B 5
devices to the output, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL
resistor in parallel across the last device. + SUPPLY A 4

COMMON C 3
No connection should be made to “+ Supply”
EOL
terminal. RESISTOR
10 K Ω

IN– / OUT+ B 2
Each output channel is individually activated for
response pattern: + SUPPLY A 1
A2285

– supervisory Figure 3-35—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)—


– continuous output Class A
– 60 beats per minute
– 120 beats per minute
– temporal
– timed COMMON C 3
– trouble.

Supervised Output—
IN– / OUT+ B 2
Agent Release (Solenoid Circuit)
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate + SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring, CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
WITHIN THE EDIO MODULE.
refer to Figure 3-36. A2322

Figure 3-36—Supervised Output Configuration (Agent Release)


For Class A wiring, refer to Figure 3-37. Note that two
channels are used for one output circuit. Trouble
indication is provided for any open wire and the
COMMON C 6
output can still be activated with a single open wire.

No connection should be made to “+ Supply”


terminal. IN– / OUT+ B 5

+ SUPPLY A 4
The output of the EDIO module supervises the
releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid. COMMON C 3
It is essential to utilize a releasing device approved for
use with this output module. This type of output does NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO
NOT NEED TO BE INSTALLED
not require the use of EOL resistors or diodes to ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS
IN– / OUT+ B 2
supervise the circuit. PROVIDED WITHIN THE
EDIO MODULE.

+ SUPPLY A 1
B2286

Figure 3-37—Supervised Output Configuration (Agent Release)—


Class A Wiring

15.1 3-36 95-8533


The output can be configured for latching, Table 3-10—Maximum Wire Length for Releasing Applications
continuous, supervisory, trouble or timed response.
Maximum Wire Length in Feet
Device
To ensure adequate operating voltage for the output 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
device, the maximum wiring length from the power 890181* 150 100 60
source to the output device must not exceed the 895630* 150 100 60
values shown in Table 3-10 for automatic release
897494* 190 120 75
applications. (For solenoids, this wire length includes
both the wiring from the power supply to the EDIO 570537** 3000 1900 1200 750
module and the wiring from the module to the *Fenwal Solenoid
solenoid.) **Ansul Solenoid

Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action


To ensure proper operating voltage, the input voltage
to the EDIO must be in the range from 21 to 30 vdc CONFIGURATION
and the maximum wiring length must not exceed the
values shown in Table 3-11 for deluge and pre-action Setting EDIO Network Address
applications. Per FM Approval requirements, the One unique network address must be assigned to
secondary power must provide capacity for a 90 hour each EDIO module. The address is set by the 8
minimum standby operation followed by a minimum of switch DIP assembly on the EDIO module.
10 minutes of releasing and alarm operation. The
initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge When using the switches located on the EDIO
and pre-action system configuration must use module, the address is binary coded and is the sum
Class A wiring or be wired in conduit within 20 feet of all switches placed in the “closed” position.
from the EDIO.
Each discrete point of an EDIO module has a tag
NOTE number and a descriptor for unique identification. A
In EQP systems with EQP2120PS(–B) Power tag number must include zone designation, which will
Supplies, the secondary power is customer be shown on the controller's display when the point is
supplied and must be accepted by the Authority in alarm.
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
device configuration. The following shows the
minimum software/firmware releases:

Controller Firmware S3
Revision Version Version
B 4.28 3.1.0.0

Table 3-11—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)


D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking 11601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

15.1 3-37 95-8533


8 CHANNEL DISCRETE INPUT/ WIRING
OUTPUT (DCIO) MODULE All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
INSTALLATION connectors furnished with the module. See Figure
3-38 for terminal identification.
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install and configure the 8 Channel DCIO Module.
Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
24 Vdc Power Input
MOUNTING
Power connections to the DCIO depend upon the
The DCIO must be properly installed in a suitable
total current consumption of all the channels in the
enclosure that is rated for the location. The enclosure
device. Each output-configured channel can
must provide space to install and wire the DCIO
consume up to 2 amperes. Total output current
module and must also provide for ground wire
should be limited to 10 amperes. Connect the power
termination. Access into the enclosure is gained by
supply to terminals 1 and 2 or to terminals 4 and 5.
using a special tool to open the enclosure. The
Power wire shielding should be connected to
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
terminals 3 and 6.
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
1— +
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
2— –
is going to be installed.
3— Shield*
4— +
The DCIO can be panel or DIN rail mounted.
5— –
6— Shield*
NOTE
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
inches clearance between the module and other *Shields on power wires are optional unless required
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring by local codes.
and ventilation.
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
2. If additional terminals are required for powering
other devices, these devices should be connected to
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to
terminals 3 and 6.

COM Connector, Terminals 1 to 6


LON Terminals
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
3 & 6 — shield connections.

15.1 3-38 95-8533


EQ3700DCIO
COMMON C 24
IN–/OUT+ B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20 CHANNEL 7


LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
IN–/OUT+ B 17 CHANNEL 6
+ SUPPLY A 16

COMMON C 15
IN–/OUT+ B 14 CHANNEL 5
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
IN–/OUT+ B 11 CHANNEL 4
+ SUPPLY A 10

COMMON C 9
IN–/OUT+ B 8 CHANNEL 3
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + IN–/OUT+ B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3

POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2 CHANNEL 1


+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. B2097

Figure 3-38—DCIO Module Wiring Terminal Configuration

Channel Connectors, Terminals 1 to 24


Terminals A, B & C
Channels 1 to 8 Input / Output Terminals
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal
descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each
diagram. The information is typical for channels 2-8.

Unsupervised Input
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals. See Figure 3-39.
COMMON C 3

Input to the DCIO consists of one or more normally


open or normally closed switches.
IN– / OUT+ B 2

Note
+ SUPPLY A 1
An EOL resistor is not required.
B2090

Note
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
terminal. Figure 3-39—Unsupervised Input Configuration

15.1 3-39 95-8533


COMMON C 3
COMMON C 3
EOL
EOL RESISTOR
RESISTOR 10 K Ω
10 K Ω
IN– / OUT+ B 2
IN– / OUT+ B 2
+ SUPPLY A 1
+ SUPPLY A 1

B2091

Figure 3-40—Supervised Input Configuration Figure 3-42—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)

Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision Supervised Output Notification (Horns and Strobes)
Class B Supervised Outputs for Open & Short Circuits
Class B
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
3-40. on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-42.

The input to the DCIO module consists of one or The output of the DCIO module supervises the
more normally open switches, with a 10K ohm, 1/4 notification circuit by reversing the polarity of the
watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last switch. monitoring circuit.

Note Note
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply” Polarity MUST be observed when connecting
terminal. the notification device.

Supervised Input (IDCSC) Open and Short Circuit It is critical to use a notification device approved for
Supervision fire alarm notification. These devices are polarized
(Three state – open, switch closure, and short) and do not require the use of an external diode for the
Class B supervision of the circuit. Wire one or more
notification devices to the output, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last device.
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-41.
Indication of short circuit fault is provided.
Note
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
The input to the DCIO module consists of a normally
terminal.
open switch, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in
parallel across the switch, and a 3.3 K ohm, 1/4 watt
Each output channel is individually activated for
resistor in series with the switch.
response pattern:
Note – continuous output
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
– 60 beats per minute
terminal. For correct operation, only one input
switch can be used per channel. – 120 beats per minute
– temporal
– supervisory
COMMON C 3
INLINE
RESISTOR EOL
– timed
3.3 K Ω RESISTOR
10 K Ω – trouble.
IN– / OUT+ B 2

+ SUPPLY A 1

B2092

Figure 3-41—Supervised Input Configuration (Opens and Shorts)

15.1 3-40 95-8533


Supervised Output for Automatic Release The output of the DCIO module supervises the
Supervised Output for Open Circuits releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid.
It is essential to use a releasing device approved for
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
use with this output module.
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-43.
Note
Wire one or more releasing devices to the module
This type of output does not require the use of
output.
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.
Note
Make no connection to the “+ Supply” terminal.
Note
Fo r n e w o r r e t r o f i t i n s t a l l a t i o n s , a ny
The output of the DCIO module supervises the manufacturer’s non-water based agent release
releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid. valves can be wired into the outputs of the ARM
It is essential to use a releasing device approved for or DCIO modules as long as the devices utilize
use with this output module. 24 vdc and do not exceed 2 amperes current
draw.
Note
This type of output does not require the use of Note
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit. For FM system approval listing, pre-action and
deluge applications require that only FM
approved deluge valves can be wired into the
The output can be configured for latching, continuous
ARM or DCIO modules. Table 3-13 lists the
or timed response.
supported solenoid groups. Remember that the
valves must utilize 24 vdc and must not exceed
To ensure proper operating voltage, the maximum
2 amperes current draw.
wiring length from the power source to the DCIO
module must not exceed the values shown in Table
The output can be configured for latching, continuous
3-12 for automatic release applications.
or timed response.
Note
To ensure proper operating voltage, the input voltage
For solenoids, this wire length includes both the
to the DCIO must be in the range from 21 to 30 vdc
wiring from the power supply to the DCIO
and the maximum wiring length must not exceed the
module and the wiring from the module to the
values shown in Table 3-13 for deluge and pre-action
solenoid.
applications. Per FM Approval requirements, the
secondary power must provide capacity for a 90 hour
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action minimum standby operation followed by a minimum of
10 minutes of releasing and alarm operation. For
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-43.
and pre-action system configuration, an Enhanced
Discrete Input/Output Module (EDIO) must be
used.

Table 3-12—Maximum Wire Length for Automatic Releasing


Applications
COMMON C 3
Maximum Wire Length in Feet
Device
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
890181* 150 100 60
IN– / OUT+ B 2
895630* 150 100 60
+ SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE. 897494* 190 120 75
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
A2323 WITHIN THE DCIO. 570537** 3000 1900 1200 750

*Fenwal Solenoid
Figure 3-43—Supervised Output Configuration (Automatic Release) **Ansul Solenoid

15.1 3-41 95-8533


Table 3-13—Maximum Wire Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)


D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking 11601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

NOTE 8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE


In EQP systems with EQP2120PS(–B) Power INSTALLATION
Supplies, the secondary power is customer
supplied and must be accepted by the Authority The following paragraphs describe how to properly
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). install and configure the 8 Channel Relay Module.

Unsupervised Output Ancillary Applications


(Unrelated to Fire Detection/Protection) MOUNTING

Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals The Relay Module must be properly installed in a
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-44. suitable enclosure that is rated for the location. The
enclosure must provide space to install and wire the
Note relay module and must also provide for ground wire
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply” termination. Access into the enclosure is gained by
terminal. using a special tool to open the enclosure. The
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
CONFIGURATION equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
Setting DCIO Network Address is going to be installed. The device can be panel or
One unique network address must be assigned to DIN rail mounted.
each DCIO module. The address is set by the 8
switch DIP assembly on the DCIO module. The NOTE
address is binary coded and is the sum of all It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
switches placed in the “closed” position. inches clearance between the module and other
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring
Each discrete point of a DCIO module has a tag and ventilation.
number and a descriptor for unique identification. A
tag number must include zone designation, which will
be shown on the controller's display when the point is WIRING
in alarm. All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
connectors furnished with the module. See Figure
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for 3-45 for terminal identification.
device configuration. The following shows the
minimum software/firmware releases:
COMMON C 3
Controller Firmware S3
Revision Version Version
A 1.03 2.0.2.0 IN– / OUT+ B 2

+ SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED


TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
A2323 WITHIN THE DCIO.

Figure 3-44—Unsupervised Output Configuration


15.1 3-42 95-8533
Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6 Channel Connectors, Terminals 1 to 24
24 Vdc Power Input
Unsupervised Output Ancillary Applications
1— + (Unrelated to Fire Detection/Protection)
2— –
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
3— Shield*
on the relay module terminal block. See Figure 3-45.
4— +
5— –
6— Shield* CONFIGURATION
*Shields on power wires are optional unless required
by local codes. Setting Relay Module Network Address
One unique network address must be assigned to
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and each relay module. The address is set by the 8
2. If additional terminals are required for powering switch DIP assembly on the relay module. The
other devices, these devices should be connected to address is binary coded and is the sum of all
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to switches placed in the “closed” position.
terminals 3 and 6.
Each discrete point of a relay module has a tag
COM Connector, Terminals 1 to 6 number and a descriptor for unique identification.
LON Terminals
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON. device configuration. The following shows the
minimum software/firmware releases:
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1 Controller Firmware S3
4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
Revision Version Version
5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
3 & 6 — shield connections. A 2.01 2.8.0.0

EQ3720RM
NC C 24
NO B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD COMMON A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A NC C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD NO B 20 CHANNEL 7


LON TO COMMON A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
NC C 18
COM
NO B 17 CHANNEL 6
COMMON A 16

NC C 15
NO B 14 CHANNEL 5
COMMON A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND NC C 12
NO B 11 CHANNEL 4
COMMON A 10

NC C 9
NO B 8 CHANNEL 3
COMMON A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – NC C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + NO B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD COMMON A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + NC C 3

POWER NO B 2 CHANNEL 1
COMMON A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. C2206

NOTE: RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN IN REST (DE-ENERGIZED) STATE.

Figure 3-45— Relay Module Wiring Terminal Configuration

15.1 3-43 95-8533


ANALOG INPUT MODULE Power Connector — Terminals 1 to 6
INSTALLATION 24 Vdc Power Input
1— +
MOUNTING 2— –
3— Shield*
The Analog Input Module must be properly installed in
4— +
a suitable enclosure that is rated for the location. The
5— –
enclosure must provide space to install and wire the
6— Shield*
device and must also provide for ground wire
termination. Access into the enclosure must be gained
by using a special tool to open the enclosure. The *Shields on power wires are optional unless required
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range by local codes.
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that 2. If additional terminals are required for powering
is going to be installed. other devices, these devices should be connected to
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to
NOTE terminals 3 and 6.
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
inches clearance between the module and other COM Connector — Terminals 1 to 6
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring LON Terminals
and ventilation.
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
WIRING 2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring 4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
connectors furnished with the module. (Connectors 5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
accept up to 12 AWG wire.) Refer to Figure 3-46 for 3 & 6 — shield connections (shields required).
identification of module wiring terminals.
EQ3710AIM
COMMON C 24
4-20 MA IN B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21

SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD 4-20 MA IN B 20 CHANNEL 7


LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
4-20 MA IN B 17 CHANNEL 6
+ SUPPLY A 16

COMMON C 15
4-20 MA IN B 14 CHANNEL 5
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
4-20 MA IN B 11 CHANNEL 4
+ SUPPLY A 10

COMMON C 9
4-20 MA IN B 8 CHANNEL 3
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + 4-20 MA IN B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3

POWER 4-20 MA IN B 2 CHANNEL 1


+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. A2224

Figure 3-46—Analog Input Module Wiring Terminal Configuration

15.1 3-44 95-8533


CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
COMMON C 3 COMMON C 3 –

4-20 MA IN B 2 SIG 4-20 MA IN B 2 SIG

+ SUPPLY A 1 + + SUPPLY A 1 +
A2235 A2236

Figure 3-47—Two-Wire Transmitter — Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Figure 3-49—Three-Wire Transmitter — Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA


Current Output (Sourcing) Current Output (Sourcing)

CHANNEL 1 HIM CHANNEL 1 HIM TRANSMITTER

COMMON C 3 6 COMMON 3 TRANSMITTER COMMON C 3 6 COMMON 3 –

4-20 MA IN B 2 5 4-20 MA IN 2 SIG 4-20 MA IN B 2 5 4-20 MA IN 2 SIG

+ SUPPLY A 1 4 + SUPPLY 1 + + SUPPLY A 1 4 + SUPPLY 1 +


A2238 A2239

Figure 3-48—Two-Wire Transmitter with HART Interface Module — Figure 3-50—Three-Wire Transmitter with HART Interface Module —
Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Current Output (Sourcing) Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Current Output (Sourcing)

Channel Connectors — Terminals 1 to 24 CONFIGURATION


4-20 mA Input Devices
Setting Analog Input Module Network Address
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the analog input module terminal block. See One unique network address must be assigned to
Figure 3-47 for an example of a 2-wire input. See each analog input module. The address is set by the
Figure 3-48 for a 2-wire input with HART interface 8 switch DIP assembly on the analog input module.
module. See Figure 3-49 for a 3-wire input, where the
transmitter must source a 4-20 mA signal. See Figure When using the switches located on the analog input
3-50 for a 3-wire input with HART interface module. module, the address is binary coded and is the sum
of all switches placed in the “closed” position.
Only channel 1 is shown in each diagram. The
information is typical for channels 2-8. Each point of an analog input module has a tag
number and a descriptor for unique identification. A
Analog Input Module Channels used as NFPA 72 tag number must include zone designation, which will
Approved 4-20 mA Flame Detector Input be shown on the controller's display when the point is
in alarm.
Configure the High Alarm setpoint at 19 mA via the S3
configuration screen, and use the High Alarm to
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
trigger the Fire Alarm in S3 logic. The AIM sends an
device configuration. The following tables show the
exception message for the High Alarm so there is no
minimum software/firmware releases:
delay in transmitting the Fire Alarm.

Fault indications and other status information must be For Gas Applications
decoded in logic from the analog process variable. A Controller Firmware* AIM S3
five second delay should be used to avoid indicating Rev. Version Rev. Version Version
an incorrect status condition while the analog value is B 3.06 B 1.02 2.9.1.1
changing between two values. See Table 3-14.
*for part number 007606-002
Table 3-14—Analog Values (in mA) for Fault and Status Indications
when the AIM is Used as a 4-20 mA Flame Detector Input
For Flame Applications
Status X3301/2 X5200 X9800 X2200 Controller Firmware* AIM S3
Fault 0-3.5 0-3.5 0-3.5 0-3.5 Rev. Version Rev. Version Version
IR Pre-Alarm 7.0-9.0 C 5.52 D 1.07 4.0.0.0
UV Alarm 11.0-12.99 *for part number 008983-001
IR Alarm 13.0-14.99
Pre-Alarm 15.0-16.99 15.0-16.99 15.0-16.99

15.1 3-45 95-8533


GAS DETECTOR LOCATION AND Note
INSTALLATION The use of the Sensor Separation Kit will be
required in some installations.
Gas detection devices must be properly located to
provide maximum protection. Determining the proper
number of devices and placement varies depending ENVIRONMENTS AND SUBSTANCES THAT
on the specific requirements of the area of protection. AFFECT GAS DETECTOR PERFORMANCE
Catalytic sensors should be located where they are
The following should be considered when locating a
safe from potential sources of contamination that can
gas detection device:
cause a decrease in the sensitivity of the device
including:
1. Gas type. If it is lighter than air (acetylene,
hydrogen, methane, etc.), place the sensor above
A. Substances that can clog the pores of the flame
the potential source. Place the sensor close to
arrestor and reduce the gas diffusion rate to the
the floor for gases that are heavier than air
sensor including:
(benzene, butane, butylene, propane, hexane,
pentane, etc.) or for vapors resulting from
Dirt and oil, corrosive substances such as Cl2
flammable liquid spills.
(Chlorine) or HCl, paint overspray, or residue from
cleaning solutions that can clog the flame arrestor.
NOTE
Air currents can cause a gas that is heavier than
Note
air to rise. Also, if the gas is hotter than ambient
A dust cover should be installed to protect the
air, it could also rise.
flame arrester whenever these conditions exist.

2. How rapidly will the gas diffuse into the air? B. Substances that cover or tie up the active sites on
Select a location for the sensor as close as the catalytic surface of the active sensing element
possible to the anticipated source of a gas leak. such as volatile metal organics, gases, or vapors
of hydrides, and volatile compounds containing
3. Ventilation characteristics. Air movement will phosphorous, boron, silicone, etc.
cause gas to accumulate more heavily in one area
than another. The devices should be placed in Examples:
areas where the most concentrated accumulation RTV silicone sealants
of gas is anticipated. Silicone oils and greases
Tetraethyl lead
4. Devices should be pointed down to prevent the Phosphine
buildup of moisture or contaminants on the filter. Diborane
Silane
5. Devices must be accessible for testing and Trimethyl chlorsilane
calibration. Hydrogen fluoride
Boron trifluoride
Phosphate esters

15.1 3-46 95-8533


C. Materials that remove the catalytic metals from EQ22XXDCU DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT USED
the active element of the sensor. Some WITH DET-TRONICS H2S/O2 SENSORS OR OTHER
substances react with the catalytic metal forming TWO-WIRE 4-20 MA DEVICES
a volatile compound that can erode the metal
Determine the best mounting locations for the
from the surface of the sensor’s active element.
detectors. Whenever practical, detectors should be
placed where they are easily accessible for
Halogens and compounds containing halogen are
calibration.
materials of this nature and others include:

Examples: WARNING!
Chlorine
Do not apply power to the system with the cover
Bromine
removed unless the area has been verified to be
Iodine
free of combustible gases or vapors.
Hydrogen Chloride, Bromide or Iodide
Organic halides:
The DCU utilizes the following:
Trichloroethylene
Dichlorobenzene
1. A terminal wiring board mounted at the bottom of
Vinyl chloride
the junction box.
Freons
Halon 1301
2. A communication module mounted above the
(Bromotrifluoromethane).
terminal wiring board using the standoffs
provided. See Figure 3-51.
Note
Brief exposure to these materials can temporarily
increase sensor sensitivity due to the surface of Assembly and Wiring Procedure
the active element being etched. Prolonged
Attach the sensor to the DCU enclosure. Do not over-
exposure continues this process until the
tighten. If a sensor separation kit is being used,
sensitivity of the sensor is degraded, resulting in
attach the sensor to the separation kit junction box
shortened sensor life.
and wire the device as described in the “Sensor
Separation” section.
D. Exposure to high concentrations of combustible
gases for extended periods of time can stress the
sensing element and seriously affect its
performance.

The degree of damage to the sensor is COMMUNICATION MODULE

determined by a combination of contaminant


type, contaminant concentration in the
atmosphere, and the length of time the sensor is
exposed.

Note
If a sensor has been exposed to a contaminant
or a high level of combustible gas, it should be
calibrated at the time of exposure. An additional STANDOFFS (4)

calibration a few days later should be performed


to determine whether a significant shift in TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
sensitivity has occurred. If necessary, sensor
should be replaced.

Note
A1571
A combination of accessories such as rain
shields and dust covers is not recommended
and can result in slow response to a gas leak. Figure 3-51—Printed Circuit Boards in Universal DCU

15.1 3-47 95-8533


CAUTION! POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1

The sensor threads can be coated with an


4 TO 20 MA IN 2
appropriate grease to ease installation. Also
lubricate the cover threads. (See “Ordering
– 3
Information” for part number of recommended
lubricant.) SENSOR POWER
+ 4

Connect the external wiring to the appropriate


A
terminals on the DCU terminal wiring board. Refer to 5

Figure 3-52 for terminal identification. See Figure COM 2


B
3-53 for an example of a Det-Tronics electrochemical 6

sensor connected to a DCU.


7 14 –

Attach the communication module to the standoffs as COM SHIELD


13 –
shown in Figure 3-51. Connect the ribbon cable from 8
24 VDC
the terminal wiring board to the communication
A 12 +
module. 9

COM 1
B 11 +
Set the address for the device. Refer to “Setting 10
A1726
Device Network Addresses” for complete information
regarding the switch setting procedure.
Figure 3-52—Wiring Configuration for DCU
Check the wiring to ensure proper connections, then
pour the conduit seals and allow them to dry (if DCU H2S/TOXIC/O2

conduit is being used).


POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1

NOTE
4 TO 20 MA IN 2 BLACK
Before placing the cover back on the enclosure
following completion of assembly and wiring,
– 3 RED
inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is
SENSOR POWER
in good condition and properly installed.
+ 4 GREEN
Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the cover
with a thin coat of an appropriate grease to ease
A 5
installation. Refer to the “Ordering Information”
COM 2
section for the part number of the recommended
B 6
grease (available from Detector Electronics). If
the installation uses catalytic type combustible
7 14 –
gas sensors, it is imperative that lubricants
COM SHIELD
containing silicone not be used, since they will
8 13 –
cause irreversible damage to the sensor. Place
24 VDC
the cover on the enclosure. Tighten only until
A 9 12 +
snug. Do not over tighten.
COM 1
B 10 11 +
Sensor Separation for DCU with H2S and O2 A1875

Sensors
Since the transmitter for the electrochemical sensor is Figure 3-53—Electrochemical Sensor Connected to DCU
already mounted within the sensor housing, simply
mount the entire sensor assembly to the sensor
Table 3-15
separation kit junction box and wire it to terminals 2 Maximum Separation Distances — Electrochemical Sensor to DCU
and 4 inside the DCU, the same as a regular (without
sensor separation) installation. Connect the shield to Wire Size Maximum Wiring Distance
the ground terminal in the DCU junction box.
(AWG) Feet Meters

Refer to Table 3-15 for separation distance limitations 18 5700 1750


for H2S and O2 sensors 16 9000 2800
T0020A

15.1 3-48 95-8533


EQ22XXDCU DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT DCU POINTWATCH

USED WITH POINTWATCH/DUCTWATCH


POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1 YELLOW

Determine the best mounting location for the detector.


Whenever practical, detectors should be placed 4 TO 20 MA IN 2 WHITE

where they are easily accessible for calibration.


– 3 BLACK

WARNING! SENSOR POWER


+ 4 RED

Do not apply power to the system with the cover


removed unless the area has been verified to be A 5 GREEN

free of combustible gases and vapors. COM 2


B 6

The DCU utilizes the following:


7 14 –
1. A terminal wiring board mounted at the bottom of COM SHIELD

the junction box. 8 13 –


24 VDC

2. A communication module mounted above the A 9 12 +


terminal wiring board using the standoffs COM 1

provided. See Figure 3-51. B 10 11 +


A1876

Assembly and Wiring Procedure


Figure 3-54—PointWatch/DuctWatch Connected to DCU
Attach the PointWatch/DuctWatch to the DCU
enclosure. Do not over-tighten. If a sensor
separation kit is being used, attach the sensor to the
separation kit junction box and wire the device as
described in the “Sensor Separation” section. Sensor Separation for DCU with PointWatch
Shielded four wire cable is recommended for
Refer to the PointWatch instruction manual (form connecting the detector junction box to the DCU.
number 95-8440) or the DuctWatch instruction manual Cable with a foil shield is recommended. The shield
(form number 95-8573) for complete installation and of the cable should be open at the detector junction
application information. box and connected to earth ground at the DCU
junction box.
Refer to Figure 3-54 when wiring a PointWatch IR gas
detector and a DCU. The wiring code for PointWatch NOTE
is: To ensure proper operation, it is essential to
Red = + (24 vdc) maintain a minimum of 18 vdc (including ripple)
Black = – (common) at the PointWatch detector.
White = 4 to 20 ma signal
Yellow = Calibration input
Green = Chassis ground

Set the address for the device. Refer to “Setting


Device Network Addresses” for complete information
regarding the switch setting procedure.

15.1 3-49 95-8533


EQ22XXDCUEX DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT 7. Plug the sensor into P2 on the transmitter board.
(USED WITH DET-TRONICS COMBUSTIBLE GAS
SENSORS) 8. Mount the transmitter board to the terminal wiring
board and attach with the standoffs.
Mounting
NOTE
Determine the best mounting location for the device.
Be sure to note the correct orientation of the
Whenever practical, the device should be placed
transmitter board. If the transmitter board is
where it can easily be reached for calibration.
rotated 180° from proper orientation, the device
w i l l n o t o p e r a t e c o r r e c t l y — a LO N
IMPORTANT!
communication fault will result. See Figure 3-56.
Always orient the junction box with the sensor
pointing down. 9. Plug the ribbon cable into the communication
module and re-attach it to the transmitter board.

WARNING! 10. Set the device network address. (See “Setting


Device Network Addresses” in this section.)
Do not apply power to the system with the cover
removed unless the area has been verified to be
11. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
free of combustible gases or vapors.
in good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
threads of the junction box cover with a thin coat
Wiring of silicone-free grease (available from Det-
Tronics).
1. Remove the cover from the DCUEX.
12. Replace the device cover.
CAUTION!
ALWAYS discharge static from tools and hands
DCU TERMINAL BOARD DCU TRANSMITTER BOARD1
by touching the device body before touching the (MIDDLE BOARD)

communication module or transmitter board. POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1

2. Loosen the screws on the communication module 4 TO 20 MA IN 2


2
SIG
and remove it from the transmitter board
standoffs. – 3
2

SENSOR POWER
3. D i s c o n n e c t t h e r i b b o n c a b l e f ro m t h e + 4
2
+
communication module.
A 5
4. Remove the standoffs and detach the transmitter COM 2
board from the terminal wiring board. Do not B 6
disconnect any wiring.
7 14 –
5. Connect all external wiring to the terminal wiring COM SHIELD
board. (See Figure 3-55.) 8 13 –
24 VDC

Note A 9 12 +
Make sure the ribbon cable is connected to the COM 1
terminal wiring board. B 10 11 +
B1877

6. Attach the sensor to the device enclosure. DO NOTES: 1 Catalytic Combustible Gas Sensor
NOT overtighten. Plugs into Connector Pins on the
Middle Board inside the Junction Box.

2 Connections Wired at the Factory.


Note
If a sensor separation kit is being used, attach
the sensor to the separation kit junction box. Figure 3-55—DCU Transmitter Board Connected
to Terminal Wiring Board
(See Sensor Separation with DCUEX below.)

15.1 3-50 95-8533


COMMUNICATION MODULE Sensor Separation with DCUEX
If the installation requires mounting the sensor in a
different location than the DCUEX, observe the
SWITCHES ON SAME SIDE
(RIGHT) following guidelines.

There are two (2) methods that can be used to


TRANSMITTER BOARD separate the sensor from the DCUEX:

Preferred Method
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
1. Disassemble the DCUEX and remove the
transmitter board. (Refer to “Wiring” for
disassembly procedure.) Do not re-assemble at
CORRECT ORIENTATION OF TRANSMITTER BOARD this time.

2. Mount the transmitter board inside the sensor


separation junction box (remove the existing
COMMUNICATION MODULE board).

N G Note
This assembly can be separated from the

O
SWITCHES ON OPPOSITE SIDES
(WRONG) DCUEX by up to 1000 feet using three conductor

R
18 AWG shielded cable. (Regardless of
separation distance, operating voltage at the

W
TRANSMITTER BOARD
transmitter must be at least 18 vdc for proper
device operation.) (See Figure 3-57.)
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD

3. Mount the sensor to the separation junction box.


DO NOT overtighten. Plug the sensor into P2 on
the transmitter board.
INCORRECT ORIENTATION OF TRANSMITTER BOARD

4. Use a three conductor 18 AWG shielded cable to


connect P1 on the transmitter board to terminals
2, 3 and 4 on the DCU terminal board (See Figure
3-57). Connect the shield to the ground terminal
in the DCUEX junction box.
COMMUNICATION MODULE
5. Connect all external wiring to the terminal wiring
board inside the DCU (if not already completed).
Re-assemble the DCUEX as described in the
“Wiring” section. When completed, it should look
TRANSMITTER BOARD similar to the DCU as shown in Figure 3-51.

6. Inspect the O-ring on the DCU and separation


STANDOFFS (4)
junction box to be sure that they are in good
condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD the junction box cover with a thin coat of silicone-
free grease (available from Det-Tronics).

B1570 7. Replace the cover on the DCU and separation


junction box.

Figure 3-56—Printed Circuit Boards in Combustible Gas DCU

15.1 3-51 95-8533


Table 3-16—Maximum Separation Distances —
Combustible Gas Sensor to DCU (Alternate Method)

Maximum Separation Distance


Wire Size
Feet Meters
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)* 40 12
16 AWG (1.5 mm2)* 60 18
14 AWG (2.5 mm2)* 100 30
12 AWG (4.0 mm2)* 150 45
*Approximate Metric Equivalent.

Alternate Method

GR

If the transmitter board must be mounted separate


N

+
from the sensor (high temperature applications, etc.),
separate the sensor only, leaving the transmitter PC

board inside the DCUEX enclosure. When using this


GR
N

installation option, see Table 3-16 for maximum wiring


distances.
ELECTROCHEMICAL SENSOR
Mount the sensor directly to the separation kit junction
box. Use three conductor shielded cable for the
connection between the terminal block in the
separation kit junction box and P2 on the DCUEX
SPARE CHASSIS
transmitter board. A plug with screw terminals is
CAL CAL provided for connecting the cable to P2 on the
transmitter board. Observe the wiring color code.
4-20 4-20
RET RET

Connect the shield to the ground terminal in the


GND

+24 +24

DCUEX junction box.

DCU TERMINAL BOARD

1 POINTWATCH CALIBRATE
POINTWATCH

2 4 TO 20 MA IN
P1

3 –
SENSOR POWER

4 +

SIG – +
A 5

COM 2
4 TO 20 TRANSMITTER BOARD
– B 6
+

7 14 –
COM SHIELD
P2
8 13 –
NOTE: ALWAYS ORIENT 24 VDC
JUNCTION BOX WITH
CATALYTIC SENSOR
POINTING DOWN. A 9 12 +
COM 1
SENSOR
B 10 11 +
C1878
CATALYTIC SENSOR

Figure 3-57—Sensor Separation Kits

15.1 3-52 95-8533


EQ25XXARM SERIES AGENT RELEASE MODULE Terminals 5 to 10 — LO N s i g n a l i n g c i r c u i t
terminals
Mounting
Note
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
LON.
device dimensions.)
5— “A” side of signaling
Wiring circuit for COM 2
To ensure proper operating voltage for the output 6— “B” side of signaling
device, the maximum wiring length from power source circuit for COM 2
to device must not exceed the values shown in Table
3-17 for automatic release applications or Table 3-18 7 and 8 — s h i e l d
for deluge and pre-action applications. connections

Note 9— “A” side of signaling


For solenoids, this wire length includes both the circuit for COM 1
wiring from power supply to device, and the
10 — “B” side of signaling
wiring from device to solenoid.
circuit for COM 1
See Figure 3-58 for identification of wiring terminals. Terminals 11 to 14 — 24 vdc power input

Terminals 1 to 4 — Output terminals Connect module power


supply to terminals 12 and
Connect a single solenoid 13.
between terminals 1 and 4.
Connect dual solenoids Note
between terminals 1 and 2, If an auxiliary output supply is used for powering
and between terminals 3 and solenoids, it should be connected to terminals 11
4. and 14.

NOTE
For testing purposes, a load resistor of 1200 to
1500 ohms @ 1 watt can be placed across Table 3-17—Maximum Wiring Length for Automatic Release
terminals 1 and 4. Applications

Maximum Wire Length in Feet


Device
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
CAUTION! 890181* 150 100 60
DO NOT intermix different types of initiators in 895630* 150 100 60
release circuit. 897494* 190 120 75
570537** 3000 1900 1200 750

*Fenwal Solenoid
**Ansul Solenoid

15.1 3-53 95-8533


Table 3-18—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications

Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)


D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking 11601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)

SINGLE DUAL
SOLENOID SOLENOIDS

+ 1

– 2

+ 3

– 4

A 5

COM 2
B 6

7 14 –
COM SHIELD

8 13 –
24 VDC

A 9 12 +
COM 1
B 10 11 +

NOTE:
TERMINALS 12 AND 13 ARE FOR MODULE POWER SUPPLY.
TERMINALS 11 AND 14 ARE FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY.
JUMPERS JP2 AND JP3 MUST BE REMOVED IF AN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED.

Figure 3-58—Wiring Configuration


EXPLOSIVE INITIATOR OPTION for Agent Release Module

SEE NOTE 2.

NOTES:
1. JUMPER JP1 MUST BE REMOVED IF EXPLOSIVE INITIATOR IS USED.

15.1 3-5410 OHMS CIRCUIT RESISTANCE.


2. RESISTOR IS USED TO COMPENSATE FOR 95-8533
RESISTOR MUST BE RATED 1 WATT MINIMUM (WIRE-WOUND RESISTOR PREFERRED).
WHEN MEASURING THE TOTAL RELEASE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE,
USE AN OHM METER WITH A CURRENT OUTPUT OF 10 MA MAXIMUM.

3. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EXPLOSIVE INITIATORS PER CIRCUIT IS 12.


EACH CIRCUIT MUST NOT EXCEED 10 OHMS INCLUDING CABLE RESISTANCE. B1900
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block. See Figure 3-58. Wire one or JP1
more releasing devices to the module output. JP2
JP3
11 12 13 14

The output of the Agent Release Module supervises


the releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
solenoid. It is essential to use a releasing device
approved for use with this output module.

Note
This type of output does not require the use of A1902

EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.

Figure 3-59—Agent Release Module Wiring Terminals and Jumpers


The output can be configured for latching, continuous
or timed response.

To ensure proper operating voltage, the input voltage


to the release module must be in the range from 21 to EQ25XXSAM SERIES SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
30 vdc and the maximum wiring length must not
exceed the values shown in Table 3-18 for deluge and Mounting
pre-action applications. Per FM Approval
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
requirements, the secondary power must provide
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
capacity for a 90 hour minimum standby operation
device dimensions.)
followed by a minimum of 10 minutes of releasing and
alarm operation. The initiating device circuit(s) for
use with the deluge and pre-action system Wiring
configuration must be wired within 20 feet and in
conduit from an IDC or DCIO. In addition, power for
IMPORTANT!
the device(s) must be per NFPA 72 Class A wiring
techniques. To ensure adequate operating voltage for the
signaling device, the maximum wiring length
NOTE from the power source to the output device must
In EQP systems with EQP2120PS(–B) Power not exceed the values shown in Table 3-19. (This
Supplies, the secondary power is customer wire length includes both the wiring from the
supplied and must be accepted by the Authority power supply to the signal audible module and
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). the wiring from the module to the signaling
device.)

Jumpers See Figure 3-60 for identification of wiring terminals.


Terminals 13 and 14 are connected by jumper JP2
and terminals 11 and 12 are connected by jumper
JP3. These two jumpers (JP2 and JP3) must be cut if Table 3-19—Maximum Wiring Length
from Nominal 24 VDC Power Source to Signaling Device
an auxiliary output power supply is being used. (See
Figure 3-59 for jumper locations.)
Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)

When an explosive initiator is being used, jumper JP1 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG
must be cut. If a solenoid is used, the jumper must (4 mm2)* (2.5 mm2)* (1.5 mm2)*
remain in. One 2 Ampere Load 190 (58) 120 (37) 75 (23)
Address Setting Two 2 Ampere Loads 95 (29) 60 (18) 35 (11)

Set the device network address. (See “Setting Device * Approximate Metric Equivalent. T0029A
Network Addresses” in this section.)

15.1 3-55 95-8533


Terminals 1 to 4 — Output terminals
+ 1

Connect the first output OUTPUT 1* 10K EOL


device between terminals 1 2

and 2, and the second


+
between terminals 3 and 4. 3

OUTPUT 2* 10K EOL


Note 4

Polarity shown in Figure 3-60 is for monitoring


condition; polarity is reversed when activated. A 5

COM 2

Each circuit must have a 10 B 6

kohm EOL resistor.


7 14 –
Terminals 5 to 10 — LON signaling circuit COM SHIELD

terminals 8 13 –
24 VDC

Be sure to observe polarity A 9 12 +


when wiring the LON. COM 1
B 10 11 +
5— “A” side of signaling B1901

circuit for COM 2 * POLARITY SHOWN IS FOR MONITORING CONDITION,


POLARITY IS REVERSED WHEN ACTIVATED.

6— “B” side of signaling NOTE:


TERMINALS 12 AND 13 ARE FOR MODULE POWER SUPPLY.
circuit for COM 2 TERMINALS 11 AND 14 ARE FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY.
JUMPERS JP1 AND JP2 MUST BE REMOVED IF AN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED.

7 and 8 — s h i e l d
Figure 3-60—Wiring Configuration for Signal Audible Module
connections

9— “A” side of signaling


circuit for COM 1

10 — “B” side of signaling


circuit for COM 1

Terminals 11 to 14 — 24 vdc power input

Connect the module power


supply to terminals 12 and
13. If an auxiliary output
supply is used for powering
signaling devices, it should
be connected to terminals 11
and 14.

Jumpers
JP1
Terminals 13 and 14 are connected by jumper JP2 11 12 13 14
JP2
and terminals 11 and 12 are connected by jumper
JP1. These two jumpers (JP1 and JP2) must be cut if
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
an auxiliary output power supply is being used. (See
Figure 3-61) for jumper locations.

Address Setting
B1903
Set device network address. (See “Setting Device
Network Addresses” in this section.) Figure 3-61—Signal Audible Module Wiring Terminals and Jumpers

15.1 3-56 95-8533


SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SETTING DEVICE NETWORK ADDRESSES BINARY
VALUE 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

Overview of Network Addresses


NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE OPEN = OFF
Each device on the LON must be assigned a unique OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES CLOSED = ON
A2190
address. Addresses 1 to 4 are reserved for the
controller. Valid addresses for field devices are from
Figure 3-63—Address Switch for DCIO and Relay Module
5 to 250.

IMPORTANT
If the address is set to zero or an address above Example: for node No. 5, close rocker switches 1
250, the communication module will ignore the and 3 (binary values 1 + 4); for node No. 25, close
switch setting. rocker switches 1, 4 and 5 (binary values 1 + 8 + 16).
Duplicated addresses are not automatically detected. Note
Modules given the same address will use the number The field device sets the LON address only when
given and report to the controller using that address. power is applied to the device. Therefore, it is
A "Rogue Device" message will be displayed when important to set the switches before applying
two LON devices have duplicate addresses assigned power. If an address is ever changed, system
to them. The status word will show the latest update, power must be cycled before the new address
which could be from any of the reporting modules will take effect.
using that address.
After setting address switches, record the address
Setting Field Device Addresses number and device type on the “Address Identification
Chart” provided with this manual. Post the chart in a
Selection of the node address for field devices is convenient location near the Controller for future
done by setting rocker switches on an 8 switch “DIP reference.
Switch” within each device’s housing.

Note
Only the first eight of the 12 switches are used
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
for selecting the device address. Figure 3-64 is a simplified drawing of a typical EQP
system. This system includes an EQP Controller,
The address number is binary encoded with each DCIO and various LON field devices.
switch having a specific binary value with switch 1
being the LSB (Least Significant Bit). (See Figure
3-62) The device’s LON address is equal to the
added value of all closed rocker switches. All “Open”
switches are ignored.

NOTE
The address switches in the DCIO module and
relay module appear slightly different than those
in other devices. Refer to Figure 3-63.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4

OPEN OPEN
BINARY
VALUE 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
LEAVE IN
OPEN POSITION
NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE OPEN = OFF
OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES CLOSED = ON
A1557

Figure 3-62—Field Device Address Switches for


ARM, SAM, DCU and IDC

15.1 3-57 95-8533


15.1
+ +
– –
– POWER –
+ DISTRIBUTION + X3301 / X5200 / X2200 / X9800
+ Flame Detectors

+ – + –
CONTROLLER EQ3700DCIO* EQ2100PSM EQ2200IDC EQ3720RM
P1 P1 P1
6 SHIELD 3 4 SHIELD 9 13 SHIELD 3 13 SHIELD 3 3 SHIELD 6

4 24 VDC – 2 5 24 VDC – 2 6 24 VDC – 7 13 24 VDC – 14 11 24 VDC – 1 11 24 VDC – 1 2 24 VDC – 5

3 24 VDC + 1 4 24 VDC + 1 5 24 VDC + 8 11 24 VDC + 12 12 24 VDC + 2 12 24 VDC + 2 1 24 VDC + 4


P7 P2
P2
COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1

51 SHIELD 48 6 SHIELD 3 12 SHIELD 1 7 SHIELD 8 16 SHIELD 6 16 SHIELD 6 6 SHIELD 3

52 B 49 5 B 2 11 B 3 6 B 10 14 B 4 14 B 4 5 B 2

53 A 50 4 A 1 10 A 2 5 A 9 15 A 5 15 A 5 4 A 1
P6
SHUNT P3
C 45
C 1 N CIRCUIT 1 + 1
FAULT NO 46 P4 P3
B 2 CIRCUIT 1 – 2
NC 47 A + SUPPLY A AC LINE
P9 P8 3 CIRCUIT 2 + 3

CH 1
B IN–/OUT+ B

CH 5
+ –
GND 5 57 GND GND 54 24 VDC 4 H CIRCUIT 2 – 4
C COMMON C SUPPLY
RXD 2 58 RxD B 55
TXD 3 59 TxD A 56 A + SUPPLY A
DB-9 H N

3-58
P2 P3
CONNECTION AC LINE

CH 6
B IN–/OUT+ B

CH 2
TO COM PORT 5 1+ 5+ 13
OF PC
6 1– 5– 14 C COMMON C
+ –
7 2+ 6+ 15
A + SUPPLY A 24 VDC
8 2– 6– 16 BATTERY
B IN–/OUT+ B

CH 3

CH 7
9 3+ 7+ 17 EQ24xxNE EQ22xxDCU PIRECL/OPECL EQ25xxARM EQ25xxSAM
10 3– 7– 18 C COMMON C
4 SHIELD 9 6 SHIELD 3

DIGITAL INPUTS
11 4+ 8+ 19
A + SUPPLY A
12 4– 8– 20 6 24 VDC – 7 13 24 VDC – 14 4 24 VDC – 1 13 24 VDC – 14 13 24 VDC – 14

CH 4

CH 8
B IN–/OUT+ B
P4 P5 5 24 VDC + 8 11 24 VDC + 12 5 24 VDC + 2 11 24 VDC + 12 11 24 VDC + 12
21 C C 33 C COMMON C
COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1
22 NO NO 34

RELAY 1
RELAY 5
12 SHIELD 1 7 SHIELD 8 12 SHIELD 9 7 SHIELD 8 7 SHIELD 8
23 NC NC 35
* LON AND POWER TERMINALS ALSO
24 C C 36 VALID FOR AIM, RM, EDIO. 11 B 3 6 B 10 11 B 8 6 B 10 6 B 10
SEE INDIVIDUAL DEVICE FOR
25 NO NO 37
CHANNEL TERMINALS.

RELAY 2
RELAY 6
10 A 2 5 A 9 10 A 7 5 A 9 5 A 9
26 NC NC 38
THE DEVICE’S CHASSIS GROUND
27 C C 39 TERMINAL SHOULD BE POINTWATCH
CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND. CALIBRATE 1 CALIBRATE 13 + 1 OUTPUT 1 + 1
28 NO NO 40

RELAY 3
RELAY 7
4 TO 20 MA IN 2 – 2 OUTPUT 1 – 2
29 NC NC 41
– 3 + 3 OUTPUT 2 + 3
30 C C 42 SENSOR
DUAL SOLENOIDS
SINGLE SOLENOID

POWER
31 NO NO 43 + 4 – 4 OUTPUT 2 – 4

RELAY 8

RELAY 4
D2100
32 NC NC 44

95-8533
Figure 3-64—A Typical System
Section 4 Enter chooses the menu item selected, and advances
the menu to the next options list. (See “Controller
Operation Menu Options“ in this section for additional
information.)

SYSTEM CONTROLLER Note


Pressing Enter while alarms are actively scrolling
PUSHBUTTONS returns the display to the Main Menu.

The Controller has seven pushbuttons (located on the Next allows the operator to scroll through options
front panel) for user interface. These pushbuttons listed within each menu. Each time the NEXT
allow the operator to interact with the Controller to pushbutton is pushed, the current options list indexes
respond to alarms and system status conditions, up one list item. (See “Controller Menu Options” in
access system status reports, and configure Controller this section for additional information)
time and date settings.
Previous allows the operator to scroll through options
The following paragraphs describe the function of listed within each menu. Each time the PREVIOUS
each pushbutton. Refer to Figure 4-1 for Controller pushbutton is pushed, the current options list indexes
pushbutton locations. down one list item. (See “Controller Menu Options” in
this section for additional information)
Cancel cancels the selected command, and returns
the menu to the last option list displayed. Reset resets all controller latched outputs that are no
longer active.

Acknowledge silences the internal beeper.

Silence turns on the Silence LED and sets Silence


status in user logic.

DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER


Safety System Controller
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Figure 4-1—EQP Controller Pushbutton Locations

15.1 4-1 95-8533


CONTROLLER STATUS INDICATORS CONTROLLER MENU OPTIONS
System status is visually displayed on the Controller The Controller is designed to display system status
in two ways — through the use of a Text Display (see and device related information. The following
Figure 4-2), and through colored LED’s (see Table paragraphs describe how to move around within the
4-1). The following paragraphs describe these controller’s menu structure to access this information
indicators and the function of each. and perform minor system settings (see Figure 4-3).

Note
TEXT DISPLAY
During normal operation (no alarms or trouble
The Controller uses a text based display to show conditions occurring), the display scrolls current
current system status, active Alarms and Faults. system time and date.

When an alarm or trouble condition occurs, the Main Menu displays a list of options to access
display scrolls a detailed message of the condition, information types available for display through the
including tag number, condition (alarm, trouble, Controller. This list also includes access to options
supervisory etc.) and time/date. If multiple alarms or used to set system date and time, and diagnostics
trouble conditions exist, the display scrolls through all options.
active status conditions until they go inactive and are
reset using the controller pushbutton.

DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER


Safety System Controller
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Figure 4-2—EQP Controller Message Display and System Status Indicator Location

Table 4-1—EQP Controller LED System Status Indicators


LED Function Status
Green Power On when power is applied.
Red Fire Alarm On (latched) when any fire alarm is active (Fire detected).
Amber Trouble On (latched) when a fault is detected in the system. (Indicates "Trouble" relay state.)
Amber Ack On when the Acknowledge button is pressed.
Amber Silence On when Silence pushbutton is pressed.
Amber Inhibit On when any input channel is inhibited.
Amber Out Inhibit On when any output is inhibited.
Red High Gas On (latched) when any gas detector is at or above the High gas alarm value.
Red Low Gas On (latched) when any gas detector is at or above the Low gas alarm value.
Amber Supr On (latched) when any Supervisory input is active.
Amber LON Fault On when a LON fault is detected (open or short).
Amber Contrl Fault On when a processor fault occurs.

15.1 4-2 95-8533


Marque Display Alarm
Auto Scrolling Alarm
Enter / Cancel
Display Current Time/Date Screen
(no active alarms)

Enter
Display Alarms
Display Alarms Screen
Next
Enter Prev
Alarm Types
Cancel Display Devices*
Next Fire
Reset
Prev Supervisory
Device Tagname Pressing the ack
Trouble switch acknowledges
Add: xxx Device Type
Low Gas the visible alarm.
Fault/ No Fault
High Gas
Device dependent info Current
Inhibit
Output Inhibit Input State

Main Menu
Device Tagnames*
Display Alarms Alarm Type Off/On Visible if the
Display Devices Tag Name for Device n
Tag Name alarm was
Previous

Enter
Next

Device Tagnames Tag Name for Device n


Set Time & Date Cancel Alarm Description acknowledged
Tag Name for Device n
Serial Ports Time and Date ack
Diagnostics
Redundancy Info
Set Time and Date
Next and Previous buttons are used to scroll the lists.
Edit Time/Date The Enter button is used to navigate to the next level.
The Cancel button is used to back out a level.

Serial Ports*

Configuration Port
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
Serial Port 3
Serial Port 4
Redundancy Port

Diagnostics

Lamp Test – Enter

Redundancy Info

Fault:
Lst Flt:
Cntr Mode:
My Config:
Redun Mem:
HSSL Status:
Version Match:
Parser:
Comm Ack:
Lon Comm:
Msg Error:
--Master Errors--
Program Flow:
LON A Inf:
LON B Inf:
User Logic CS:
App CS:
User Logic:
Config:
--Standby Errors--
Program Flow:
LON A Inf:
LON B Inf:
User Logic CS:
App CS:
User Logic:
Config:
Power 1:
Power 2:
Option Bd:

Figure 4-3—EQP Controller Message Display Menu Outline

15.1 4-3 95-8533


Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons allows
Main Menu cycling through devices. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
>Display Alarms
Display Devices DEVICE TAG NAMES displays device tag name
Device Tagnames information for all devices on the LON loop.

Moving within the Main Menu is done by using the Device Tagnames
NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons located on the
controller’s front panel. The menu options will scroll
Controller
upward (NEXT Pushbutton) or downward (Previous Z398-80 X
Pushbutton) while the Main Menu name remains
stationary. When the desired menu option is selected
by the “>” indicator, the ENTER pushbutton is pressed
to advance the menu display to the desired Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbutton allows
information set. cycling through devices. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
Note
Pressing the CANCEL pushbutton from within S et T ime and Date p ro v i d e s a c c e s s t o
any sub-menu returns the display to the Main configuration controls for system clock and date
Menu. The display will also return to the Main settings.
Menu if left unattended for a period of 20
minutes. If an alarm or trouble condition is
present after 20 minutes, the display will change
to the existing Alarm or Trouble message. Set Time & Date
DISPLAY ALARMS displays a list of existing Alarms 11:20:52
and Trouble conditions. Moving within this menu is Jul 29 / 2002
done by using the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons.

Note
When the Set Time and Date menu opens, the
Alarm Type Off/On current hour will flash.
Tag Name
Alarm Description To move within this menu, press the ENTER
pushbutton until the desired property is flashing. To
Time & Date ack set the desired property value, press the NEXT
Pushbutton to increase or PREVIOUS Pushbutton to
decrease the value. When the desired value is
Note displayed, press the ENTER pushbutton. This will
Multiple alarm information can be viewed by advance the menu to the next property and it will
pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons. flash. When all desired properties have been entered,
Pressing CANCEL will return the menu to the press the ENTER pushbutton until the message “Press
DISPLAY ALARMS menu. ENTER to Save” is displayed. When the ENTER
pushbutton is pressed, the settings are saved and the
menu changes back to the MAIN MENU.
DISPLAY DEVICES displays device information on all
devices on the LON loop. Device tag name, type, and
node address are displayed.

Z398-63 U / I
Add:63 UV / IR Detect
No Fault

15.1 4-4 95-8533


SERIAL PORTS displays port information on all Cntr Mode
available ports.
Indicates whether the controller is in master or
standby mode.

Serial Ports My Config


Configuration Port Indicates whether the controller is the primary or
Serial Port 1 secondary controller.
Serial Port 2
Redun Mem
Displays how long it takes to transfer the local and
Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbutton allows
global memory between controllers.
cycling through ports. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
HSSL Status
DIAGNOSTICS displays information for factory field
An error is generated when a problem is detected on
service.
the high-speed communication link between
controllers. This fault is annunciated when the
standby controller is offline.
Diagnostics
Lamp Test -Enter- Version Match
Display: Traditional
To ensure proper redundant operation, the firmware
HW Version: 2 versions of redundant controllers must match. This
error is set when a mismatch is detected. Consult the
factory for firmware upgrades.
Redundancy Info displays the current status of all
redundancy related faults. It can be used to monitor SIL Rating
the health of the master and standby controllers. It
To ensure proper redundant operation, the SIL rating
can also be used for diagnostic purposes.
of redundant controllers must match. An error is
indicated if a SIL controller is paired with a non‑SIL
Redundancy faults originate from three general areas:
rated controller. Consult the factory for details.
• Self detected internal failures of the master
controller
Parser
• Inter-controller communications
As the master controller configures a standby
• A failure in the standby controller. controller, configuration information is extracted from
non-volatile memory and checked for errors.
Any redundancy fault is annunciated by the master
controller, and the redundancy fault code of the
Comm Ack
highest priority fault is displayed. The controller also
provides a diagnostic menu for more detailed Critical information is exchanged between controllers
information on the source of a redundancy problem. on the HSSL using acknowledged messages. The
All redundancy related faults must be cleared to master sends data packets that contain an embedded
insure proper redundancy operation. CRC and a transaction number. The standby
validates the message by calculating and comparing
the CRC values. If the CRC is correct the standby
Fault
saves the data and returns an acknowledge message
Displays the current redundancy fault. with the transaction number. If an acknowledge
message with the proper transaction number is not
received by the master within the allotted time the
Lst Flt
message is resent. When all retries are used the
Displays the last redundancy fault that occurred. acknowledge error is indicted and acknowledged
communication is terminated.

15.1 4-5 95-8533


Lon Comm Config
Redundant controllers exchange information across This fault is annunciated when a controller has not
the LON network. This is primarily done to prevent been configured or the configuration information has
both controllers from becoming the master in the been corrupted.
event that the HSSL fails. The fault is annunciated
when a controller fails to receive any information from
Power 1
the other controller.
Displays the power 1 status on the standby controller.
Msg Error
Power 2
If the standby controller receives a message from the
master that has the correct CRC but invalid data an Displays the power 2 status on the standby controller.
error message is returned. This master will indicate
the error with this fault.
Option Bd
Indicates whether there is a fault on the ControlNet
Program Flow
option board of the standby controller.
Program flow checking ensures that essential
functions execute in the correct sequence. If any
CONTROLLER AUDIBLE ALARM
functions don’t execute properly, or execute in the
wrong order, the program flow error is set and control The Controller features an internal audible alarm for
is transferred to the standby controller. local system status notification (see Table 4-2 and
Figure 4-4). When the system is operating in the
normal mode (no Alarm or Fault conditions occurring),
LON A/B Inf
the alarm is silent (off). If an event (any alarm or
Controllers utilize neuron co-processors to interface trouble condition) occurs, the alarm will remain active
with the field device network. If an error is detected in until it is acknowledged by pressing the Acknowledge
the operation of the co-processor, a LON interface pushbutton or reset by pressing the Reset pushbutton
fault is annunciated. on the Controller front panel.

User Logic CS
Controllers continually conduct a checksum test of the Table 4-2—EQP Controller Alarm Tone Patterns
user logic program to ensure that the data remains
unchanged. A user checksum fault is annunciated if Priority Controller Tone Tone Pattern
the result is incorrect.
1 Fire Alarm Temporal

App CS 2 Supervisory Supervisory


When the controller firmware is generated a checksum 3 Trouble Trouble
of the program is calculated and saved in memory.
Each controller is continually conducting a checksum 4 High Gas Gas
test of the program to ensure that the data remains
unchanged. The application checksum fault is 5 Low Gas Gas
annunciated if the result is incorrect. 6 Normal Off

User Logic
Many checks are conducted while the controller
interprets and executes the user program. The user
logic error is generated if invalid or out of range data
is detected.

15.1 4-6 95-8533


0.5 SEC 0.5 SEC 1.5 SEC SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DURING A
CONFIGURATION DATA DOWNLOAD
FIRE
ALARM During a configuration download, the controller
receives configuration data that is stored into flash
0.1 SEC 0.1 SEC
memory. During the download process, the controller
2.0 SEC halts normal operation and resets a number of
SUPERVISORY
controller functions. Items affected and displayed
during a configuration data download are listed in the
0.5 SEC following steps:
5.0 SEC
1. Halt the static logic and user logic programs.
TROUBLE

0.5 SEC 0.5 SEC 3.0 SEC 2. Ignore field device LON communications.
However, the controller continues to generate the
HIGH/LOW LON heartbeat.
GAS
B1855
3. Silence the Controller’s audible annunciator.
Figure 4-4—Tone Pattern for Controller Buzzer
4. Initiate a Trouble condition that is signaled by the
amber Trouble LED and relay.

5. Clear all Alarm and Fault events.


Note
6. De-energize all 8 Controller relays.
If multiple alarms are present, “Acknowledging”
will silence the audible alarms.
7. Ignore Modbus communication.

CONTROLNET STATUS INDICATORS


(Optional)
The optional ControlNet status indicator LEDs function
as follows: (see Table 4-3)
Steady - The indicator is on continuously in the
defined state.
Alternating - The two indicators alternate between the
two defined states at the same time (applies to both
indicators viewed together). The two indicators are
always in opposite states, out of phase.
Flashing - The indicator alternates between the two
defined states (applies to each indicator viewed
independent of the other). If both indicators are
flashing, they must flash together, in phase.

15.1 4-7 95-8533


Table 4-3—Status of ControlNet LED Indicators

A and B Cause Action


Off No power None or power up.
Steady red Faulted unit Cycle power.
If fault persists, contact the factory.
Alternating red/green Self-test None
Alternating red/off Incorrect node configuration Check network address and other ControlNet configuration
parameters.

A or B Cause Action
Off Channel disabled Program network for redundant media, if required.
Steady green Normal operation None
Flashing green/off Temporary errors None; unit will self-correct.
Listen only Cycle power.
Flashing red/off Media fault Check media for broken cables, loose connectors,
missing terminators, etc.
No other nodes present on network Add other nodes to the network.
Flashing red/green Incorrect network configuration Cycle power or reset unit.
If fault persists, contact the factory.

8. ControlNet communication continues. 12. Initialized the ControlNet option board with new
parameters.
9. Text display’s first line indicates "*** Program
Mode ***" 13. Enable static logic and user logic programs to
operate. The first scan program is run first.
10. Text display’s third line displays download status.
14. Accept field device LON communications.
a) "Config Download" indicates the serial transfer
into memory from the PC to the Controller. 15. Poll the device type variable from LON field
devices.
b) "Erasing Flash" indicates that the controller is
electronically erasing the contents of the Flash 16. Configure LON field devices.
memory.
17. Clear the Trouble condition.
c) "Writing to Flash" indicates that configuration
data stored in memory is being written down 18. Text display shows a normal operation marquee
into Flash memory. message.

d) "Flash Lock" indicates that the controller is a) Text display’s first line indicates "Det-Tronics
locking the configuration data into the Flash Eagle Quantum Premier".
memory.
b) Text display’s third line displays time (24 hour
Caution format) and date (month day/year).
The controller’s configuration data will be
corrupted if power is removed during a note
download. Contact the factory if this occurs. Depending on the condition of the LON devices,
faults may persist for a number of minutes.
11. Initialize the RS-485 and configuration serial ports
with new parameters.

15.1 4-8 95-8533


CONTROLLER REDUNDANCY 6. If there are no faults present, the primary controller
defaults to the master controller and the
Pushbuttons secondary controller defaults to the standby
controller.
The pushbuttons are active on the master controller
and inactive on the standby controller.
7. The master controller executes user logic and
communicates with the connected LON devices.
Controller Status Indicators
8. The standby controller indicates that it is in
The status indicators are active on the master
standby mode and monitors the master controller.
controller. All LEDs except the power LED are off and
the trouble relay is in the no trouble state.
9. The master and standby controller go through a
synchronization process.
Controller Relay Operation
10. The power-up sequence is complete.
The controller relays are fully functional on the master
controller and the standby controller.
Synchronization
Text Display When a master controller detects a standby controller
on the HSSL, it performs the following synchronization
The text display on the master controller is fully
process:
functional as explained in the previous section. The
text display on the standby controller reads **Standby
1. Compare controller firmware versions and SIL
Mode**, Ready.
rating. If they are not an exact match, the process
stops and a fault is generated. Consult the
Controller Menu Options factory for details.
The menu options are active on the master controller
2. Standby controller indicates the synchronization
and inactive on the standby controller.
steps.

ControlNet Status Indicators 3. Compare the user application programs. If there


is a mis-match, the master will configure the
The ControlNet status indicators are active on the
standby controller via the HSSL.
master and standby controller. See Table 4-3 for
details.
4. Initiate the data synchronization process.

Power-up Sequence 5. Transfer the status of device inhibits and device


removes.
The power-up sequence for a redundant controller
pair is as follows:
6. Transfer the complete alarm list, including alarm
history.
1. Make sure the LON and HSSL are connected
correctly.
7. Transfer the real time clock (RTC) value.
2. Apply power to both controllers.
8. Copy the local and global memory to the standby
controller.
3. Controllers go through their boot-up routine.
9. Synchronization is complete and the standby
4. The controller that is connected with the primary
controller indicates “Ready”.
end of the HSSL is identified as the primary
controller and is assigned address 1.

5. The controller that is connected with the


secondary end of the HSSL is assigned address
2.

15.1 4-9 95-8533


Sequence of Events During a Configuration Automatic Switchover
Download
An automatic transfer will be initiated if the master
controller goes into an error (self detected internal
warning controller failure, program flow error in the controller,
The system is inactive and not executing logic/ user logic checksum error or application checksum
alarm functions during a program download (in error). An automatic switchover executes the following
b o t h s i n g l e a n d re d u n d a n t c o n t ro l l e r sequence:
configurations).
1. Check that the standby controller is online by
When downloading a new configuration to the master verifying that HSSL communication is good and
controller, the following sequence is executed: there are no internal faults in the standby
controller.
1. The S3 software must be connected to the master
controller. 2. Verify that the synchronization process is
complete.
2. Alter the configuration and execute the download
command from S3. 3. The master requests the standby to take control.

3. The master controller goes into ‘Program’ mode 4. The standby takes control and becomes the
and passes mastership to the standby controller. master.

4. The updated configuration file is loaded into the


controller. Replacing a Faulty Controller
If the master controller fails and the standby controller
5. The controllers are automatically forced to switch is healthy, an automatic switchover will occur. To
over. replace the failed controller, perform the following
steps:
6. The master controller puts the standby controller
into ‘Program’ mode and downloads the 1. Remove power. Disconnect plugs and remove
configuration. the failed controller.

7. The controller indicates “Device Download Active” 2. Mount the new controller.
until the LON devices have been successfully
updated. 3. Connect the LON to the new controller.

8. The configuration download is now complete. 4. Connect the HSSL.

Manual Switchover 5. Connect any other I/O used.

The user can request a manual switchover from an 6. Apply power to the controller.
externally wired switch. The request executes the
following sequence: 7. A controller synchronization occurs and the new
controller is configured and indicates “Ready” as
1. Verify that HSSL communication is good and there the standby controller.
are no internal faults in the standby controller.
8. If preferred, perform a manual switchover to return
2. Verify that the synchronization process is the primary controller to the master status.
complete.

3. The master requests the standby to take control.

4. The standby takes control and becomes the


master.

5. The controller indicates “Device Download Active”


until the LON devices have been successfully
updated.

15.1 4-10 95-8533


ENHANCED DISCRETE I/O MODULE
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs

The EDIO Module (see Figure 4-5) has 18 LED status


indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-4 and 4-5 for a description of the LED indicators.

POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-5—EDIO Module Status Indicator Location

EDIO module power-up sequence illuminates the


LEDs for the device and all of its channels. First the
power and fault LEDs are illuminated, indicating that
the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are Table 4-4—EDIO Module - Device Status Indicators
illuminated in the following sequences:
LED Device Status
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing Green On when power is present.
through channel 8. Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated, problem.
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned Note
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through Blinks one time at power-up.
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.

When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the EDIO Table 4-5—EDIO Module - Channel Status Indicators
module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip LED Channel Status
switches 1 though 8 will be displayed on channels 1 Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON closed or the output circuit is active.
position, the channel active red LED will be Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
illuminated. The address is displayed for two present or channel is not properly configured.
seconds. Steady indicates a channel fault.

Once the address has been displayed, the device’s


fault LED will turn off.

After the power-up sequence, the device will either


display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.

15.1 4-11 95-8533


8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs

The DCIO Module (see Figure 4-6) has 18 LED status


indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-6 and 4-7 for a description of the LED indicators.

POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-6—DCIO Module Status Indicator Location

DCIO module power-up sequence illuminates the


LEDs for the device and all of its channels. First the
power and fault LEDs are illuminated, indicating that
the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are
Table 4-6—DCIO Module - Device Status Indicators
illuminated in the following sequences:
LED Device Status
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing Green On when power is present.
through channel 8. Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated, problem.
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned Note
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through Blinks one time at power-up.
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.

When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the DCIO Table 4-7—DCIO Module - Channel Status Indicators
module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip LED Channel Status
switches 1 though 8 will be displayed on channels 1 Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON closed or the output circuit is active.
position, the channel active red LED will be Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
illuminated. The address is displayed for two present or channel is not properly configured.
seconds. Steady indicates a channel fault.

Once the address has been displayed, the device’s


fault LED will turn off.

After the power-up sequence, the device will either


display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.

15.1 4-12 95-8533


8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs

The Relay Module (see Figure 4-7) has 18 LED status


indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-8 and 4-9 for a description of the LED indicators.

POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-7—Relay Module Status Indicator Location

Relay module power-up sequence illuminates the


LEDs for the device and all of its channels. First the
power and fault LEDs are illuminated, indicating that
the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are Table 4-8—Relay Module - Device Status Indicators
illuminated in the following sequences:
LED Device Status
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
Green On when power is present.
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
through channel 8. Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated, problem.
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned Note
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through Blinks one time at power-up.
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.

When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the relay Table 4-9—Relay Module - Channel Status Indicators
module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip LED Channel Status
switches 1 through 8 will be displayed on channels 1 Red When On steady indicates the output circuit is
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON active.
position, the channel active red LED will be Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
illuminated. The address is displayed for two present or channel is not properly configured.
seconds.

Once the address has been displayed, the device’s


fault LED will turn off.

After the power-up sequence, the device will either


display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.

15.1 4-13 95-8533


ANALOG INPUT MODULE STATUS INDICATOR LEDs

The Analog Input Module (see Figure 4-8) has 18 LED


status indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-10 and 4-11 for a description of the LED indicators.

POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-8—Analog Input Module Status Indicator Location

The Analog Input Module power-up sequence


illuminates the LEDs for the device and all of its
channels. First the power and fault LEDs are
illuminated, indicating that the device is in a power-up
mode. Next the LEDs are illuminated in the following
Table 4-10—Analog Input Module - Device Status Indicators
sequences:
LED Device Status
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing Green On when power is present.
through channel 8. Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
problem.
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
Note
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through
Blinks one time at power-up.
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.

When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the analog


input module displays the device’s LON address by Table 4-11—Analog Input Module - Channel Status Indicators
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip
switches 1 through 8 will be displayed on channels 1 LED Channel Status
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON Red When Blinking indicates a low alarm.
position, the channel active red LED will be When On Steady indicates a high alarm.
illuminated. The address is displayed for two Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
seconds. present or channel is not properly configured. On
steady indicates out of range condition.
Once the address has been displayed, the device’s
fault LED will turn off.

After the power-up sequence, the device will either


display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.

15.1 4-14 95-8533


EQ21xxPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR
The power supply monitor (see Figure 4-9) has three The ground fault monitor (see Figure 4-10) has three
LEDs used to provide a visual indication of device LEDs used to provide a visual indication of device
status: status:

+ GND FLT LED


+ +

+ + 1

– GND FLT LED


+

+ +
+
+

1 + +

+ +
+
+

1
AMBER LED
PWR LED
+

RED LED
GREEN LED

Figure 4-9—EQ21xxPSM Status Indicator Location


A2243

Table 4-12—Power Supply Monitor Status Indicators Figure 4-10—Ground Fault Monitor Status Indicator Location

LED Device Status


Green When On indicates power is supplied to device.
Table 4-13—Ground Fault Monitor Status Indicators
Red When Flashing indicates an alarm or fault
condition is present. LED Device Status
Amber When on indicates device is disabled. Module
+ GND FLT LED Indicates Amber in the presence of a “+”
must be replaced.
ground fault.

– GND FLT LED Indicates Amber in the presence of a “–”


ground fault.

POWER LED Indicates Green when the unit is


powered.

note
The Ground Fault Monitor LED will respond
immediately to a ground fault condition. The
relay contact requires the condition to exist for 10
seconds before it activates.

15.1 4-15 95-8533


EQ22xxIDC SERIES INITIATING EQ22xxDCU AND EQ22xxDCUEX
DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNITS
The IDC has three LEDs (located at the center of the The DCUs have three LEDs to provide a visual
IDC communication module circuit board) to provide indication of device status. They are visible through
a visual indication of device status. the window on the enclosure cover.

Note NOTE
The Initiating Device Circuit Ground Fault If the communication module has not been
Monitor responds to the presence of a ground configured, the red LED blinks at a 4 Hz rate.
fault within the power circuitry. It provides a
supervised dry contact input and ground fault NOTE
monitoring circuitry for indicating a power supply The amber LED is provided for factory diagnostic
trouble condition. purposes and is not used in the system.
Illumination of the amber LED normally indicates
NOTE a fa i l u re i n t h e c o m m u n i c a t i o n c h i p .
A blinking red LED on an IDCSC indicates Replacement of the communication module
trouble such as a wiring fault (open or short circuit board is required.
circuit) or not configured.

Table 4-14—Initiating Device Circuit Status Indicators Table 4-15—DCU Status Indicators

LED Device status Device Status LED Status

Green When On indicates device has power. Power-up Pulsed at a rate of 0.5 Hz

Calibration Pulsed at a rate of 1 Hz or on


steady
Red When On indicates an Alarm or Fault condition is Fault Pulsed at a rate of 4 Hz
present.
On steady = One of the inputs is active. Alarm On steady
Blinking = Fault condition such as an open
input circuit or not configured.
Amber When On indicates a device is disabled. Module must
be replaced.

15.1 4-16 95-8533


EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
The EQ25xxARM has three LEDs to indicate device The EQ25xxSAM has three LEDs to indicate device
status. They are located at the center of the circuit status. They are located at the center of the circuit
board. board.

Table 4-17—Signal Audible Module Status Indicators


Table 4-16—Agent Release Module Status Indicators
LED Device Status
LED Device Status Green When On indicates device has power.
Green When On indicates device has power.
Red When On steady indicates an Active condition exists.
Red When On steady indicates an output is
activated. When Blinking indicates a Trouble condition exists.
When Blinking at a 4 Hz rate with the LED on
50%, off 50% of the time indicates a local
trouble condition such as an open output Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the electronic
circuit or low solenoid supply voltage. circuitry. Module replacement is required.

When Blinking at a 1 Hz rate with the LED on


5%, off 95% of the time indicates an isolate
condition.

When Blinking at a 1 Hz rate with the LED on


95%, off 5% of the time indicates release and
isolate. EQ24xxNE Network Extender
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the
electronic circuitry. Module replacement is The EQ24xxNE has three LEDs (one green, two
required. amber) for indicating device status.
Table 4-18—Network Extender Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green When On indicates device has power.
Flashes to indicate messages are being transferred
over the LON.
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the electronic
circuitry. Module replacement is required.

Note
When a network extender has an internal
fault, the message display will only indicate
that there is a LON fault condition existing
somewhere on the LON.

15.1 4-17 95-8533


SYSTEM STARTUP Redundant Controller

The I/O and LON wiring is correctly installed,


PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
observing polarity. All cable shields are properly
terminated and insulated.
General
Power wiring is installed and power source is
Insulate all shields to prevent shorts to device housing operational.
or to any other conductor.
Chassis ground stud must be connected to earth
Place alarm/release output in “Bypass/Isolate” when ground.
servicing devices.
The HSSL cable is connected between the two
Maintain a log book containing the type and serial controllers.
numbers of devices as well as the location and date
of installation.
EDIO/DCIO Module
Maintain a log of maintenance activities.
Verify correct address setting.
Observe normal precautions for handling electrostatic
sensitive devices. Check signal circuits for correct polarity.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors.
LON
Relay Module
Rocker switches for each LON device must be set to
the desired address prior to power-up.
Verify correct address setting.
Test the loop with no power applied. DC resistance
Check for correct output connections.
should be equal on A and B.
Check polarity on A and B (no rolls). COM 1 connects
Analog Input Module
to COM 2; COM 2 connects to COM 1. A connects
to A and B to B.
Verify correct address setting.
Measure voltage. A to chassis ground measures
Check for correct input connections.
approximately +7.5 vdc. B to ground measures
approximately –7.5 vdc. Check each channel with a loop current input.
Measure signal (400 mv P-P min.). (Use oscilloscope
if possible). Power Supplies and Power Monitors
Check fault tolerance by introducing a short.
Verify all earth ground connections as specified in the
wiring instructions.
Controller
Verify correct ac power to supply.
The I/O and LON wiring is correctly installed, Check power distribution to ensure that all devices
observing polarity. All cable shields are properly are receiving power.
terminated and insulated.
Check power trouble indicator by introducing an open
Power wiring is installed and power source is to the battery.
operational.
Chassis ground stud must be connected to earth
ground.

15.1 4-18 95-8533


Ground Fault Monitor GENERAL START-UP PROCEDURES
1. Output loads that are controlled by the system
Verify earth ground connections as specified in the
should be secured (remove power from all output
wiring instructions.
devices) to prevent actuation.
Check power distribution to ensure that all devices
are receiving power. 2. Check all system wiring for proper connection.

3. Inspect all devices to verify that they have not


DCUs
been physically damaged in shipment.
Verify correct address setting.
4. Apply power to the system.
Check modules for correct orientation.
NOTE
Check for the presence of contaminants or poisoning
To prevent the network modules from going into
agents.
a fault isolation condition, apply power to the
Device should be oriented with the sensor pointing EQP Controller prior to applying power to the
down. network devices.

5. Program the system for the desired operation


IDCs
using Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3).
Download configuration data to all devices.
Verify correct address setting.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors. NOTE
After system configuration has been completed,
the entire system should be tested for proper
ARMs
operation to ensure that configuration was
performed properly.
Verify correct address setting.
Check jumpers. 6. Calibrate the sensors.

7. Ensure that all trouble and alarm conditions have


SAMs
been cleared and the EQP Controller is reset,
then remove mechanical blocking devices (if
Verify correct address setting.
used) and restore power to the output loads.
Check signal circuits for correct polarity.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors.
Check jumpers.

15.1 4-19 95-8533


START-UP PROCEDURE FOR CONTROLLER STARTUP PROCEDURE for EDIO MODULE
The Controller is powered-up when the Power Supply
Configuration
is turned on. When the Power Supply has been
powered-up, verify power at the Controller by The EDIO Module is an eight-channel device. Each
verifying that the Green LED indicator is on. This channel is capable of being configured as an input or
indicator is located on the front of the Controller. output, independent of any other channel.

To verify that the Controller is powered-up and Note


operating properly, ensure that: The module is configured using Det-Tronics
Safety System Software.
1. When power is first applied, all LEDs are on. The
ACK LED flashes while the memory test is
Activation Time
running. When initialization is complete, only the
green power LED remains lit. Timers are made available for output circuits only.
Timers are used primarily to set the timing of output
2. The Ethernet/Serial communication indicators release in a suppression system. Timers provide a
continuously flash (if active). pulse timed output for the time period specified in the
configuration of the channel. The channel output
note goes active when commanded by the system logic
For the Ethernet Interface Board, the blue LEDs and remains on until the timer expires.
associated with ports 3 and 4 will remain on
when the ports are ready for communication.
Static Logic Mode
Flashing green and amber LEDs indicate active
transmit and receive. The amber indicator on the Each input channel can be configured as a Fire
front of the RJ45 connector indicates a 10 Mb/s Alarm, Trouble, Low Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm,
link is established. The green indicator on the Supervisory, or Other type of channel, independent of
front of the RJ45 connector indicates a 100 Mb/s any other channel configuration. The type selected
link is established. determines the logic the system uses to configure
Indicators, Alarms and Messages.
3. The Text display runs an initialization routine.
When initialization is complete and if all alarms For example: When an input is selected as Fire type,
and trouble conditions are cleared, the text the Fire LED on the Controller and Audible alarm will
display shows the current time and date. If the automatically actuate when that input channel is
controller has been unpowered for more than 12 active.
hours, the time and date may have to be set. If
an alarm or trouble condition exists, it will be
displayed until the condition is corrected and the
Reset button is pressed.

If the controller has not been software configured,


unconfigured devices will be displayed.
Configuration must be done using S3 Safety
System Software before proceeding.

4. The LEDs on the front panel provide an indication


of the system status.

5. Ensure configuration was performed properly.

6. After any modifications have been made either to


the installation or to configuration software,
always check the entire system for proper
operation in order to ensure that the changes
were performed properly.

15.1 4-20 95-8533


EDIO Startup STARTUP PROCEDURE for DCIO MODULE
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Configuration
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off. The DCIO Module is an eight-channel device. Each
channel is capable of being configured as an input or
2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state output, independent of any other channel.
of the input device (channel active LED
illuminates when the circuit is closed). Check the Note
input power supply and associated wiring. Verify The module is configured using Det-Tronics
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. Safety System Software.

3. The output circuits should indicate the proper


Activation Time
state for the programmed device (channel active
LED illuminates when the circuit is active). Check Timers are made available for output circuits only.
the power supply and associated wiring. Verify Timers are used primarily to set the timing of output
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. release in a suppression system. Timers provide a
pulse timed output for the time period specified in the
4. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition configuration of the channel. The channel output
(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is goes active when commanded by the system logic
in fault). Check the end-of-line devices and and remains on until the timer expires.
associated wiring. Verify proper voltage per the
Troubleshooting matrix.
Static Logic Mode
5. Test the entire system for proper operation to Each input channel can be configured as a Fire
ensure that the configuration was performed Alarm, Trouble, Low Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm,
properly. Supervisory, or Other type of channel, independent of
any other channel configuration. The type selected
determines the logic the system uses to configure
Indicators, Alarms and Messages.

For example: When an input is selected as Fire type,


the Fire LED on the Controller and Audible alarm will
automatically actuate when that input channel is
active.

15.1 4-21 95-8533


DCIO Startup Relay Module Startup
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The 1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off. remain off.

2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state 2. The output circuits should indicate the proper
of the input device (channel active LED state for the programmed device (channel active
illuminates when the circuit is closed). Check the LED illuminates when the circuit is active).
input power supply and associated wiring. Verify
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. 3. Test the entire system for proper operation to
ensure that the configuration was performed
3. The output circuits should indicate the proper properly.
state for the programmed device (channel active
LED illuminates when the circuit is active). Check
Analog Input Module Startup
the power supply and associated wiring. Verify
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. 1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
4. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition remain off.
(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
in fault). Check the end-of-line devices and 2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state
associated wiring. Verify proper voltage per the for the programmed device (channel active LED
Troubleshooting matrix. illuminates when the circuit is active).

5. Test the entire system for proper operation to 3. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition
ensure that the configuration was performed (channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
properly. in fault).

4. Test the entire system for proper operation to


ensure that the configuration was performed
properly.

15.1 4-22 95-8533


Section 5 To test O-ring: remove it from the enclosure and
stretch it slightly. If cracks are visible, replace it. If it
Maintenance feels dry, a thin coating of lubricant should be
applied. When re-installing the O-ring, be sure that it
is properly seated in the housing groove. It is
Note imperative that this O-ring be properly installed and in
Refer to the Eagle Quantum Premier System good condition. Failure to properly maintain it can
Safety Manual (number 95-8599) for specific allow water to enter the enclosure and cause
requirements and recommendations applicable premature failure. A coating of lubricant should also
to the proper installation, operation, and be applied to the threads on the cover before
maintenance of all SIL-Certified EQP systems. re-assembling the enclosure. This will both lubricate
the cover threads and help prevent moisture from
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE entering the enclosure.

To ensure reliable protection, it is important to check caution!


and calibrate the system on a regularly scheduled
basis. The frequency of checks is determined by the The O-rings should be lubricated with a silicone
requirements of the particular installation. free grease. The use of other lubricants is not
recommended, since they can adversely affect
the performance of some sensors. Under no
BATTERIES circumstances should a lubricant or compound
Batteries must be replaced every 48 months, or containing silicone be used on systems using
sooner if required by local codes. catalytic type combustible gas sensors.

IMPORTANT!
GAS SENSOR MAINTENANCE
Only sealed batteries are to be used.
All gas sensors must be calibrated on a regular basis.
Calibration should typically be performed every 90
MANUAL CHECK OF OUTPUT DEVICES days for catalytic and electrochemical sensors.
It is important that response devices be checked
initially when the system is installed, as well as Catalytic sensors have a finite lifespan. If a
periodically during an on-going maintenance successful calibration cannot be performed, replace
program. the sensor and recalibrate following the procedure
described in the “Calibration” section below. Always
compare part numbers to be sure that the correct
caution! replacement sensor is being used.
Be sure to secure all output devices that are
actuated by the system to prevent unwanted caution!
activation of equipment, and remember to place
these output devices back into service when the Exposure of the sensor to high concentrations of
checkout is complete. combustible gases for extended periods of time
can introduce stress to the sensing element and
seriously affect its performance. After exposure,
O-RING MAINTENANCE recalibration should immediately be performed,
and the sensor should be replaced if necessary.

warning! Note
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior Electrochemical sensors have a finite lifespan. If
to removing a junction box cover with power a successful calibration cannot be performed,
applied. inspect the hydrophobic filter. If the filter is
plugged, replace it and recalibrate the sensor. If
A rubber O-ring is used to ensure that the junction the filter is in good condition, replace the sensor.
box cover will seal tightly and provide protection Recalibrate following the procedure described in
against water entry. The enclosure should be opened the “Calibration” section.
periodically, and the O-ring inspected for breaks,
cracks and dryness.

15.1 5-1 95-8533


CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
To ensure optimum performance, calibration must be GND
performed on a regularly scheduled basis. Since
each application is different, the length of time

11
12
between regularly scheduled recalibrations can vary

13

10
14

9
from one installation to the next. In general, the more

8
7
SW1

6
frequently a system is checked, the greater the

5
4
3
MAGNETIC REED SWITCH *
reliability.

2
1
IMPORTANT!
4 to 20 ma devices not manufactured by Det-
Tronics must be pre-calibrated. To ensure A1881

adequate protection, calibration must be * TO ACTIVATE THE MAGNETIC REED SWITCH,


HOLD THE CALIBRATION MAGNET AGAINST THE SIDE OF THE ENCLOSURE
AT THE LOCATION OF THE REED SWITCH,
performed on a regularly scheduled basis. APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH ABOVE THE MOUNTING SURFACE.

Figure 5-1—DCU Terminal Wiring Board Mounted in Six-Port


NOTE Junction Box
If the calibration procedure is not completed
within 12 minutes, the detector will revert back to
the previous calibration values. The red LED will CALIBRATION ALGORITHM A
blink. The calibration will be logged as aborted. FOR MANUAL CALIBRATION OF UNIVERSAL DCU

NOTE Normal Calibration


The “Sensor Replacement” calibration procedure
1. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks
must be used for the initial calibration of a new
while the reed switch is closed.)
sensor. The “Routine Calibration” procedure can
be used for all subsequent calibrations.
2. After the reed switch has been closed for 3
seconds, the calibrate LED blinks, indicating it is
NOTE
ready for the zero input.
Some calibration procedures require the
operator to activate the reed switch located on a
3. Enter the zero input (4 ma).
circuit board inside the junction box. See Figure
5-1 for reed switch location. To activate the
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks
switch, hold the calibration magnet against the
while the switch is closed.)
side of the junction box near the switch location
approximately one inch above the mounting
5. After the reed switch has been closed for 3
surface. (Do not open the junction box.) Hold
seconds, the communication module records the
the calibration magnet in place for approximately
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
4 seconds to initiate the calibration procedure.
calibrates the zero value. (The calibrate LED
stays on steady.)

6. Apply the calibration gas.

7. The calibrate LED blinks as the input increases.

8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks


while the reed switch is closed.)

9. The communication module records the


uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
calibrates the span value after the reed switch is
on for 3 seconds.

10. The calibrate LED stays on steady.

15.1 5-2 95-8533


11. Remove the span gas, and return the analog 13. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
input to normal. turns off.)

12. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks for Note
3 seconds while the reed switch is closed) Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
calibration and starts over.
13. The calibration is complete. The calibrate LED
turns off. Note
Resetting the communication module will abort
Note the sensor replacement.
If the calibration is not completed within 12
minutes, the previous calibration values are CALIBRATION ALGORITHM C
restored and the calibration is logged as FOR COMBUSTIBLE GAS DCUs AND
aborted. The calibrate LED will flash. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF UNIVERSAL DCUs

Sensor Replacement
caution!
warning! After exposing the H 2 S sensor to high
concentrations of gas, it should be exposed to
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
fresh air for at least 30 minutes, and
to removing a junction box cover with power
re-calibrated.
applied.

1. Open the junction box cover and press the Routine Calibration
Sensor Replacement Switch.
1. Apply the zero gas.
2. The calibrate LED on the communication module
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
will flash, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
switch is activated.)
3. Replace the sensor and apply the zero input (4 ma).
3. The calibrate LED on the communication module
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
flashes, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
4. Wait until the calibrate LED stays on steady
5. The communication module records the
(approximately 4 seconds).
uncalibrated value in position one of the
calibration log and calibrates the zero value. (The
Note
calibrate LED stays on steady.)
The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
6. Apply the calibration gas.
calibrates the zero value during this time.
7. The calibrate LED flashes when the input
5. Apply the calibration gas. (The calibrate LED
increases.
flashes when the sensor detects gas.)
8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
6. When the sensor input has been stable for 30
3 seconds while the reed switch is closed.)
seconds, the communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log, and
9. The communication module records the
calibrates the span value.
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
calibration log and calibrates the span value.
7. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
10. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
8. Remove the calibration gas.
11. Remove the span gas and return the analog input
9. The communication module waits until the sensor
to normal.
input drops below 4% full scale.
12. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)

15.1 5-3 95-8533


10. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED 8. Activate the reed switch for 4 seconds. (The red
turns off.) LED flashes for 3 seconds while the switch is
activated.) The communication module records
NOTE the uncalibrated value in position one of the
If the calibration procedure is not completed calibration log and calibrates the zero value. The
within 12 minutes, calibration will be aborted and calibrate LED goes on steady.
the detector will revert back to the previous
calibration values. The red LED will flash and the 9. Move the Calibration Switch to the “calibrate”
calibration will be logged as aborted. position.

10. Apply the calibration gas and wait for the output
Initial Installation and Sensor Replacement —
to stabilize.
Combustible Gas (CGS Sensor)
NOTE 11. With 50% LFL calibration gas applied to sensor,
When replacing a sensor, compare part numbers to adjust R3 for a reading of 1.2 vdc (12 ma) on the
be sure that the correct replacement sensor is used. volt meter.

12. Move the Calibrate Switch to the “normal”


warning!
position. (The red LED flashes.)
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power 13. Activate the reed switch. The red LED flashes for
applied. 3 seconds while the switch is activated.

1. Remove the cover from the DCUEX enclosure. 14. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
2. Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the calibration log and calibrates the span value. The
communication module for approxImately 1 calibrate LED stays on steady.
second. (The calibrate LED on the communication
module flashes, indicating that it is ready for the 15. Remove the calibration gas and replace the DCU
zero input.) enclosure cover.

NOTE 16. The communication module waits until the analog


Pressing the sensor replacement switch value drops below 4% full scale. The calibration
prevents the communication module from is complete. (The calibrate LED turns off.)
generating a fault signal when the input drops to
zero due to sensor removal. The calibration will Note
not be aborted if the calibration procedure is not Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
completed within 12 minutes. the current calibration.

3. Move the Calibration Switch to the “calibrate”


Sensor Replacement — Toxic Gas
position.
NOTE
4. Replace the sensor. When replacing a sensor, compare part numbers
to be sure the correct replacement sensor is
5. Connect a volt meter to the test points on the being used.
transmitter board. Connect the “+” lead to TP1
(red). Connect the “–” lead to TP2 (black).
warning!
6. Wait at least 5 minutes for the sensor output to The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
stabilize, then adjust R2 for a reading of 0.40 vdc to removing a junction box cover with power
(4 ma) on the meter. applied.

NOTE 1. Remove the cover from the DCU enclosure.


Do not make adjustments to R1 when calibrating
the sensor. 2. Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the
communication module for approximately 1
7. Move the Calibrate Switch to the “normal” second. (The calibrate LED flashes,
position. indicating it is ready for the zero input.)

15.1 5-4 95-8533


NOTE 4. The communication module waits 3 seconds.
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch
prevents the communication module from 5. The communication module records the
generating a fault signal when the input drops to uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
zero due to sensor removal. The calibration will calibrates the span value.
not be aborted if the calibration procedure is not
completed within 12 minutes. 6. The calibrate LED stays on steady.

3. Replace the sensor. 7. The communication module waits 3 seconds.

4. Wait at least 5 minutes for the sensor output to 8. Calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED turns
stabilize. off.)

5. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for


Sensor Replacement
3 seconds while the switch is activated.) The
communication module records the uncalibrated
warning!
value in position one of the calibration log and
calibrates the zero value. (The calibrate LED The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
stays on steady.) to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
6. Apply the calibration gas. (The calibrate LED
flashes when the input increases.) 1. Open the junction box cover and press the
Sensor Replacement Switch.
7. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is activated.) 2. The calibrate LED on the communication module
flashes, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
8. The communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the first register of the 3. Replace the sensor and set the Sensor Switch
calibration log and calibrates the span value. (The (located on the sensor cell) to zero.
calibrate LED stays on steady.)
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
9. Remove the calibration gas and replace the DCU 3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
enclosure cover.
5. The communication module records the
10. The communication module waits until the analog uncalibrated value in position one of the
value drops below 4% full scale. The calibration calibration log and calibrates the zero value. The
is complete. (The calibrate LED turns off.) calibrate LED stays on steady.

Note 6. Set the Zero Switch on the sensor to the “normal”


Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts position. Apply clean air (20.9% oxygen) to set
the calibration and starts over. the sensor analog span value.

CALIBRATION ALGORITHM D 7. The calibrate LED flashes when the input goes
FOR UNIVERSAL DCUs WITH O2 SENSOR high.

Normal Calibration 8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
1. Apply clean air (20.9% oxygen).
9. The communication module records the
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
calibration log and calibrates the span value.
switch is closed.)
10. The calibration is complete. The calibrate LED
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating calibration
turns off.
has begun.
Note
Pressing the sensor replacement switch aborts
the calibration.

15.1 5-5 95-8533


CALIBRATION ALGORITHM G Note
FOR DCUs WITH POINTWATCH OR DUCTWATCH Allow at least 10 minutes for the sensor to warm
up.
Routine Calibration
Note
1. Apply the zero gas.
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch
prevents the communication module from
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
generating a fault signal when the input drops to
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
zero.
switch is activated.)
Note
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating it is ready
The calibration will not be aborted if the
for the zero input.
calibration procedure is not completed within 12
minutes.
4. When a steady zero reading is obtained, the
communication module records the uncalibrated
2. Apply zero gas.
value in the calibration log and calibrates the zero
value during this time. The LED stays on steady.
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating that it is
ready for the zero input.
5. Apply calibration gas. (The calibrate LED flashes
when the sensor detects gas.)
4. Continue from step 4 of the PointWatch/
DuctWatch routine calibration procedure
6. When the sensor input has been stable for 30
described above.
seconds, the communication module records the
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
calibrates the span value.
DEVICE CALIBRATION LOGS AND
7. The calibrate LED stays on steady. RECORDS
The DCU keeps a calibration log in non-volatile
8. Remove the calibration gas.
memory that can be used by the operator to evaluate
the remaining life of some sensors. This log includes
9. The communication module waits until the sensor
the zero, span, date and time for each successful
input drops below 4% full scale.
calibration. An aborted calibration is indicated by
zeros in the zero and span values. The calibration log
10. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
is cleared when the sensor replacement switch is
turns off.)
pressed and the calibration is successfully
completed.
NOTE
Calibration is aborted if not complete within 12
The initial calibration is logged in position one, where
minutes. If not completed, the detector will revert
it remains for the life of the sensor. If more than 8
back to the previous calibration values. The red
calibrations are performed without the sensor
LED will flash and the calibration will be logged
replacement switch being pressed, the newest
as aborted.
calibration data will replace the second oldest so that
the initial calibration data can be saved. The old
Sensor Replacement calibration data will be lost. This feature enables
sensor sensitivity trending to aid in maintenance or
warning! troubleshooting.
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
The analog value for the sensor is represented in raw
to removing a junction box cover with power
analog-to-digital counts 0 to 4095, where 0 represents
applied.
0 ma and 4095 represents 24 ma.
1. Remove power from the DCU and PointWatch/
DuctWatch unit. Replace the PointWatch unit.
Apply power. Press the Sensor Replacement TROUBLESHOOTING
Switch on the communication module for
Tables 5-1 and 5-2 are provided to assist in locating
approxImately 1 second.
the source of a system problem.

15.1 5-6 95-8533


Table 5-1—System Controller Troubleshooting Guide

Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action


Controller Power LED/ No Power to Input. - Measure input voltage (18 to 30 VDC).
Text Display OFF. - Check that P1 is fully inserted.
If voltage is present and P1 is fully inserted, replace
controller.
LON Fault – LED lit. LON wiring is shorted or open. - Check that P7 is fully inserted.
- Using the EQ Safety System Software, determine the
location of open or short via LON Diagnostics screen.
- Use a multimeter to determine wiring fault.
Trouble Relay is Active. Any monitored device in the - Using the front panel display/controls, view all points
system including ground fault in alarm/fault and identify faulted device.
in fault condition. Repair or replace faulted device as necessary.
Digital inputs are not
- Bad input switch. - Check that P2 and P3 are fully inserted.
responding.
- Faulty input channel. - Using a voltmeter, measure input terminals with contact
- Faulty wiring. closed to the input (measures 0 vdc when input contact
- Configuration error. is closed, measures approximately 23 vdc with circuit
open and 24 vdc input at the controller).
- If input does not respond to a contact closure, replace
module (verify response with EQ Safety System
Software/textual display).
- Verify configuration.
Relay outputs are not - Bad relay channel. - Check that P4 and P5 are fully inserted.
responding to an output - Faulty output wiring. - When output should be energized, measure contact
command. - User logic. resistance using an ohm meter.
- Verify that wiring from output is not open.
- Using EQ Safety System Software, verify that logic is
trying to operate the channel.
Serial links are not responding. - Faulty wiring. - Check that P8 and P9 are fully inserted.
- Incorrect serial link - Verify that communication LEDs are flashing.
configuration. - Verify that serial link configuration matches the host
- Text display shows device.
“Invalid Configuration” - Verify that wiring is not open or shorted.
Ethernet links are not - Faulty wiring. - Check that P3 and P4 are fully inserted.
responding. - Incorrect Ethernet link - Verify that communication LEDs are flashing.
configuration. - Verify that Ethernet link configuration is correct.
- Text display shows - Verify that wiring is not open or shorted.
“Invalid Configuration”
Front panel pushbuttons are - Power OFF. - Verify that power is present and P1 is fully inserted.
not working. - Controller is faulted. - Cycle power to controller.
Text display indicates a Power loss for more than - Using the Safety System Software, execute “Set RTC”,
RTC Fault. 12 hours. which downloads the current time into the Controller’s
real time clock. Alternatively, use the “Set Time and
Date” menu in the Controller.

15.1 5-7 95-8533


Table 5-2—Troubleshooting Guide - DCIO Module

I/O Type Normal (Off) Normal (On) Open (Off) Open (On) Short (Off) Short (On)
Unsupervised Input –15.4 0 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Supervised Input (EOL Resistor) –14.4 0 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Supervised Input (EOL/Inline Resistors) –15.4 –15 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Unsupervised Output –15.4 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Supervised Output (Agent Release) 0 to 2.1 Note 2 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Supervised Output (Notification) –14.4 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Notes:
1. All measurements are in Volts and are measured in reference to the common terminal and 24.0 Vdc is the module’s input.
2. Value is dependent on the resistance of the solenoid attached.

REPLACEMENT PARTS DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN


Eagle Quantum Premier devices are not designed to Prior to returning devices or components, contact the
be repaired in the field. If a problem should develop, nearest local Detector Electronics office so that a
first carefully check for proper wiring, programming Service Order number can be assigned. A written
and calibration. If it is determined that the problem is statement describing the malfunction must
caused by an electronic defect, the device must be accompany the returned device or component to
returned to the factory for repair. expedite finding the cause of the failure.

NOTE Pack the unit or component properly. Use sufficient


When replacing a device, be sure that all rocker packing material in addition to an antistatic bag or
switches on the replacement are set the same aluminum-backed cardboard as protection from
as the original device. Consult the settings electrostatic discharge.
documented during system installation and
setup to determine proper settings for the new Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the
device. Remove power before removing a factory in Minneapolis.
device or plugging in a replacement unit. When
a device is replaced, configuration is done
automatically.

15.1 5-8 95-8533


ORDERING INFORMATION LON Devices
Part Number Description
When ordering, please specify:
006608-xxx EQ22xxIDC Initiating Device Circuit
Refer to the appropriate model matrix in Appendix G for 006943-xxx EQ22xxIDCGF Ground Fault Monitor
the following devices: 007257-xxx EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Device Circuit
Short Circuit
EQ3XXX EQP Controller
006607-xxx EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication
EQ3700DCIO Discrete Input/Output Module
Unit (specify gas)
EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module
006733-xxx EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module
EQ3720RM Relay Module
006738-xxx EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module
EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module
006941-xxx EQ24xxNE Network Extender
008056-001 HART Interface Module
Power Supplies
008982-001 EQ3LTM LON Termination Module
Part Number Description
006979-001 EQ21xxPSM Power Supply Monitor
REDUNDANCY
000604-013 EQ2110PS Power Supply (10 A / 60 Hz)
Part Number Description
000604-014 EQ2130PS Power Supply (30 A / 60 Hz)
008981-001 Controller to Controller
000604-015 EQ2175PS Power Supply (75 A / 60 Hz)
High-Speed Serial Link Cable (4 ft)
000604-034 EQ2111PS Power Supply (10 A / 50 Hz)
008982-001 EQ3LTM LON Termination Module
000604-035 EQ2131PS Power Supply (30 A / 50 Hz)
000604-036 EQ2176PS Power Supply (75 A / 50 Hz)
Controller Communication Cables
007941-001 EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor
Part Number Description
010988-001 EQP2120PS–B Power Supply,
20A/50-60 Hz, Panel Mount 007633-001 Controller RS-232 Cable,
DB9 Female PC Connection,
010988-002 EQP2120PS Power Supply,
15 ft. (4.57 m)
20A/50-60 Hz, DIN Rail Mount
007633-002 Controller RS-232 Cable,
010985-001 EQ2110PS–P Power Supply,
DB9 Female PC Connection,
10A/50-60 Hz, Panel Mount
30 ft. (9.14 m)
010985-002 EQ2110PS Power Supply,
007633-003 Controller RS-232 Cable,
10A/50-60 Hz, DIN Rail Mount
DB9 Female PC Connection,
010892-001 EQ2410PS–P Converter, 50 ft. (15.24 m)
10A/24 Vdc, Panel Mount
010892-002 EQ2410PS Converter, For additional information or for assistance in
10A/24 Vdc, DIN Rail Mount ordering, please contact:
009934-001 Diode Redundancy Module, Detector Electronics Corporation
with Mounting Bracket 6901 West 110th Street
009934-002 Diode Redundancy Module, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
DIN Rail Mount Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
Customer Service: (952) 946-6491
Fax: (952) 829-8750
Web site: www.det-tronics.com
E-mail: det-tronics@det-tronics.com

15.1 5-9 95-8533


Section 6 serial interface board—

Specifications RS-485 Communication: MODBUS master/slave


capability, ground fault monitored.
note Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to
For USCG Approved System specifications, refer 230 kbps).
to Appendix D. RS-232 Communication: MODBUS master/slave or
EQ3XXX CONTROLLER S3 configuration capability.
Digital communication, non-isolated (up to 230 kbps).
INPUT VOLTAGE— RS-232 Communication: MODBUS master/slave
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will capability.
not cause damage to the equipment. Digital communication, non-isolated (up to 230 kbps).

INPUT power— High Speed Serial Link (HSSL): Port used only for
9 watts nominal, 12 watts maximum. redundant controller to controller communication.

LON communication— Unsupervised Outputs—


Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 Dry Contact Rating: 1 ampere at 30 vdc maximum.
kbps). SPDT normally open/normally closed contact,
Configurable for normally energized or de-energized
RS-485 communication— (de-energized is the default mode).
MODBUS Master/Slave capability.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to Unsupervised Inputs—
115 kbps). Two State input (on/off). User selectable normally
open or normally closed contact (N.O. is the default).
RS-232 communication—
S3 configuration only. Trouble Output—
Digital communication, optically isolated. SPDT normally open/normally closed contact,
Non-Configurable, normally energized only.
Controlnet—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (5 Mbps). TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating (Certified Rating):
ethernet Interface board— See Certification section below.
Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
RS-485 Communication: MODBUS master/slave Excluding communication port optional modules.
capability, ground fault monitored.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to HUMIDITY RANGE—
230 kbps). 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
10/100 BASE-T Ethernet Communication: MODBUS
TCP master/slave or S3 configuration capability. VIBRATION—
FM 3260, FM 6310/6320.
10/100 BASE-T Ethernet Communication: MODBUS
TCP master/slave capability. DIMENSIONS—
High Speed Serial Link (HSSL): Port used only for See Figure 6-1.
redundant controller to controller communication.
Shipping Weight—
5 pounds (2.3 kilograms).

15.1 6-1 95-8533


Certification— 10.75 2.45
(27.3) (6.22)
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). 7.0
(17.78)
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
FFM
M
Tamb
®
= –40°C to +80°C.
®

DET-TRONICS
APPROVED
®
APPROVED

Performance verified. EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 5.95


Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details, Safety System Controller (15.1)

including Protected Premises Fire Alarm Systems and Eagle Quantum Premier

Time & Date


Fire Alarm

High Gas
Trouble

Cntrl Flt
Inhibit

Out Inhibit
Power

Supr 5.5
EQP Supervising Systems. Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
(14.0)

Refer to Appendix B for CSA Certification details. Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.

CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

10.75 2.70
(27.3) (6.86)
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
Ex nC IIC T4 Gc. DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER


®
EN 60079-29-1 & EN 60079-29-4. Safety System Controller
DEMKO 02 ATEX 133867X.
D

Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power


5.5
(14.0)
Tamb* = –40°C to +80°C. Time & Date High Gas

Low Gas
Cntrl Flt

Lon Fault
Out Inhibit

Ack
Supr

Silence

Tamb = –40°C to +70°C.


Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.


Ex nC IIC T4 Gc. DIN RAIL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Tamb* = –40°C to +80°C.
Tamb = –40°C to +70°C.
10.75 2.70
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx (27.3) (6.86)
approval details and Special Conditions for Safe Use.
*Applicable only if relays 1-7 (terminals 21-41) are DET-TRONICS
®

configured such that the relay contacts are normally EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 6.7
(17.0)
open and de-energized (refer to Figures 3-8 and 3-9 Safety System Controller
5.5
for relay wiring information). Eagle Quantum Premier

Time & Date


Fire Alarm

High Gas
Trouble

Cntrl Flt
Inhibit

Out Inhibit
Power

Supr (14.0)
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

DIMENSIONS OF DIN RAIL MOUNT CONTROLLER


WITH ETHERNET OR SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD

10.75 0.35
(27.3) (0.89)
8.2 2.1
(20.8) (5.3)

DET-TRONICS
®

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 5.95


Safety System Controller (15.1)
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr 6.7
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
(17.0)

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

7.0
(17.78)

DIMENSIONS OF PANEL MOUNT CONTROLLER


K2103
WITH ETHERNET OR SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD

Figure 6-1—Dimensions of EQP Controller in Inches (Centimeters)

15.1 6-2 95-8533


EQ3LTM LON TERMINATION MODULE EQ3730EDIO ENHANCED DISCRETE
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
Input Voltage—
24 Vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. 10% overvoltage will not POWER REQUIREMENTS—
cause damage to the equipment. 3 watts nominal, 11 watts maximum.

Input Power— INPUT VOLTAGE—


1 watt maximum. 24 Vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. 10% overvoltage will
not cause damage to the equipment.
TEMPERATURE RANGE— 21 to 30 Vdc for Pre-action / Deluge applications.
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C). Note: For deluge and pre-action applications, input
Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). voltage to the device must be 21 Vdc minimum to ensure
proper operation of the connected output device.
HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Output Current—
10.0 amperes maximum total current, 2.0 amperes
DIMENSIONS— maximum per channel.
See Figure 6-2.
SLC OUTPUT—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
Shipping Weight—
0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
CERTIFICATION—
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
HUMIDITY RANGE—
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­). 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
VIBRATION—
FM 3260-2000 (clause 4.9).
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
DIMENSIONS—
Refer to Figure 6-3.
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc. SHIPPING WEIGHT—
FM ®
DEMKO 04 ATEX 138345X. 1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
certification—
IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X. FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc. Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
approval details and Special Conditions for CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
Safe Use.
0.7
(1.75)
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
2.95
(7.5)
Ex nA nC IIC T4 GC EN 60079-29-1.
FM ®
DEMKO 05 ATEX 138864X.
APPROVED Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
2.16
(5.5) IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
1.87 Ex nA nC IIC T4 GC.
(4.75)
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.

A2253 Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx approval


details and Special Conditions for Safe Use.
Figure 6-2—Dimensions of LON Termination Module and
HART Interface Module in Inches (Centimeters) Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.

15.1 6-3 95-8533


1.35 2.5
(3.4) (6.4)

1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6

5.02
(12.7)
4.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (11.3)

4.5
A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C (11.3) A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C

5.2
5.2 1.66 (13.2) 1.9
A2449 (13.2) (4.2) (4.8)

PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS DIN RAIL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

Figure 6-3—Dimensions of the EDIO / DCIO / Relay Module / AIM in Inches (Centimeters)

INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS INPUT CIRCUITS – TWO WIRE SMOKE/HEAT TYPE—
Supervised Input, Class B:
UNSUPERVISED INPUT—
Up to 15 two wire detectors per circuit.
Two state input (on/off).
Maximum line resistance 50 ohms.
Normally open contact.
5K ohm EOL.
SUPERVISED INPUT (Open Circuit)— Open circuit fault impedance 22k ohms.
For Class A and Class B wiring.
Two state input (active/trouble): OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING OR
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal unsupervised DEVICE CIRCUITS
– Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
– Active Circuit < 5 K ohms. UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING (Per Channel)—
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
SUPERVISED INPUT (Open and Short Circuit)— Automatic short circuit protection provided.
For Class A and Class B wiring. Instantaneous short circuit current < 15 amperes.
Three State input (active/short/open): Note: Voltage available at outputs is dependent on
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal input voltage (Vout ≈ Vin – 0.5 Vdc).
– In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms nominal
– Open Circuit > 45 K ohms OUTPUT STYLE—
– Short Circuit < 250 ohms Form "A" normally off.
– Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
RESPONSE TIME—
INPUT, TYPES— Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
Configurable for static logic applications: an alarm command message.
– Fire Alarm
– Supervisory
– Trouble
– High Gas Alarm
– Low Gas Alarm
– Other.

For Class A wiring on inputs, configure adjacent


channels for Class A wiring and connect both channels
to single contact device(s).

15.1 6-4 95-8533


SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING-Signaling CIRCUIT EQ3700 DISCRETE IO (DCIO)
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT (Per Channel)— MODULE
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
POWER REQUIREMENTS—
Automatic short circuit protection provided.
3 watts nominal, 11 watts maximum.
Instantaneous short circuit current < 15 amperes.
INPUT VOLTAGE—
SUPERVISORY CURRENT (Per Channel)—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
Reverse current monitored at 1.5 mA, ± 0.5 mA.
not cause damage to the equipment.
21 to 30 vdc for Pre-action / Deluge application.
RESPONSE TIME—
NOTE: For deluge and pre-action applications, input
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
voltage to the device must be 21 vdc minimum to ensure
an alarm command message.
proper operation of the connected output device.
EOL RESISTORS—
output voltage—
10 K ohms ±2 K ohms. Each circuit must have an
(Input voltage – 0.5 vdc) @ 2 amperes.
EOL resistor.
Output Current—
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES—
10.0 amperes maximum total current, 2.0 amperes
Configurable for device applications:
maximum per channel.
– Continuous
– 60 beats per minute
LON communication—
– 120 beats per minute
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
– Temporal Pattern.
kbps).
Note: All eight channels are synchronized when
programmed as a signaling output.
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING-Releasing CIRCUIT
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT (Per Channel)—
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum. HUMIDITY RANGE—
Automatic short circuit protection provided. 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Instantaneous short circuit current < 15 amperes.
DIMENSIONS—
SUPERVISORY CURRENT (Per Channel)— Refer to Figure 6-3.
Monitored at 1.3 mA ±0.2 mA.
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
RESPONSE TIME— 1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
an alarm command message. Certification—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES— Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
FM
FM ®
®
Configurable for device applications: APPROVED

APPROVED

– Continuous
– Timed. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.

For Class A wiring on outputs, configure adjacent Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
channels for Class A wiring and connect both channels
to single output device(s).

note
EDIO SIL has the capability of monitoring
solenoid circuits for shorts. The minimum
solenoid inductance for correct operation is 100
mH. See Table 3-11 for a list of recommended
solenoids.

15.1 6-5 95-8533


CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING CIRCUITS
UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—
Short circuit protected: 2 amperes at 30 Vdc
ATEX: FM
II 3 G.
maximum.
APPROVED

Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
® DEMKO 02 ATEX 133864X.
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—Signaling
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
D

circuit
IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT—
Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
2 amperes maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
Automatic short circuit protection provided.
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
approval details and Special Conditions for
Reverse current monitored at 3.0 mA, ± 2.0mA.
Safe Use.
RESPONSE TIME—
INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
UNSUPERVISED INPUT—
an alarm command message.
Two state input (on/off).
Normally open contact.
EOL RESISTORS—
10 K ohms ±2 K ohms.
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B—
Two state input (active/trouble):
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES—
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
Configurable for device applications:
– Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
– Continuous
– Active Circuit < 5 K ohms.
– 60 beats per second
– 120 beats per second
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B—
– Temporal Pattern.
Three State input (active/short/open):
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
Note
– In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms nominal
All eight channels are synchronized when
– Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
programmed as a signaling output.
– Short Circuit < 1.4 K ohms
– Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING— Releasing
INPUT, TYPES— circuit
Configurable for fixed logic applications:
– Fire Alarm MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT (Per Channel)—
– Supervisory 2 amperes maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
– Trouble Automatic short circuit protection provided.
– High Gas Alarm
– Low Gas Alarm SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
– Other. Monitored at 3.0 mA ±2.0 mA.

RESPONSE TIME—
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
an alarm command message.

RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES—


Configurable for device applications:
– Continuous
– Timed.

15.1 6-6 95-8533


EQ3720 RELAY MODULE EQ3710AIM ANALOG INPUT MODULE
POWER REQUIREMENTS— POWER REQUIREMENTS—
3 watts nominal, 4 watts maximum. Module power consumption: 6 watts.
When supplying power to three-wire transmitters:
INPUT VOLTAGE— Maximum current at power input: 7.4 amperes.
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will Output current: 900 mA per channel maximum.
not cause damage to the equipment.
INPUT/OUTPut VOLTAGE—
relay contacts— 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
30 VDC, 2 amps resistive. not cause damage to the equipment.
125 VAC, 0.5 amp resistive (FM and CSA only).
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
LON communication— Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps). Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

TEMPERATURE RANGE— HUMIDITY RANGE—


Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C). 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
channel accuracy—
HUMIDITY RANGE— Zero: ±0.3% full scale from –40°C to +85°C.
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Span: ±0.5% full scale from –40°C to +85°C.

DIMENSIONS— response time—


Refer to Figure 6-3. 1 to 100 LON devices: < 2 seconds
101 to 200 LON devices: < 3 seconds
SHIPPING WEIGHT— 201 to 246 LON devices: < 4 seconds.
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
Lon communication—
Certification— Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). DIMENSIONS—
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. Refer to Figure 6-3.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details. SHIPPING WEIGHT—
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
certification—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G. Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
FM ® DEMKO 03 ATEX 135246X. Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
Tamb = –40°C to +60°C.
APPROVED

CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.


IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
Tamb = –40°C to +60°C. ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc EN60079-29-1.
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and F M IECEx ® DEMKO 03 ATEX 136207X.
approval details and Special Conditions for
APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
Safe Use.
IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
RESPONSE TIME— Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
Actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging an Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
alarm command message.
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
approval details and Special Conditions for
Safe Use.

Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.

15.1 6-7 95-8533


HART INTERFACE MODULE (HIM) EQ21XXPS POWER SUPPLIES
INPUT VOLTAGE— INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will Selectable for 120, 208 or 240 vac input power,
not cause damage to the equipment. ±10%.

INPUT POWER— INPUT CURRENT—


1.0 watt maximum. 60 Hz Models:
EQ2110PS: 4 amps at 120 VAC
input/OUTPUT current— EQ2130PS: 11 / 6 / 6 amps at 120 / 208 / 240 VAC
Operating: 4 -20 mA. EQ2175PS: 24 / 15 / 12 amps at 120 / 208 / 240 VAC.
Maximum: 0-30 mA.
50 Hz Models:
EQ2111PS: 4 amps at 120 VAC
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
EQ2131PS: 6 amps at 240 VAC
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
EQ2176PS: 12 amps at 240 VAC.
Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

HUMIDITY RANGE— OUTPUT CURRENT—


5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. EQ2110PS / EQ2111PS: 10 amperes at 24 VDC
EQ2130PS / EQ2131PS: 30 amperes at 24 VDC
DIMENSIONS— EQ2175PS / EQ2176PS: 75 amperes at 24 VDC.
See Figure 6-2.
POWER CONSUMPTION—
Shipping Weight— EQ2110PS / EQ2111PS: 46 Watts
0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms) EQ2130PS / EQ2131PS: 140 Watts
EQ2175PS / EQ2176PS: 349 Watts.
CERTIFICATION—
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). Operating: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­). Storage: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C).
FFM
M ® ®
APPROVED

HUMIDITY RANGE—
APPROVED

CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.

DIMENSIONS—
ATEX FM
APPROVED II 3 G. in Inches (Centimeters)
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc. Width Height Depth
®
DEMKO 04 ATEX 136507X. EQ211xPS: 19 (48.3) 7 (17.8) 15 (38.1)
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
D

EQ213xPS: 19 (48.3) 14 (35.6) 15 (38.1)


EQ217xPS: 19 (48.3) 14 (35.6) 15 (38.1)
IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc. NOTE
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C. Power supplies are designed for mounting in a
standard 19 inch rack. Optional mounting
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx hardware is available for floor or wall mount
approval details and Special Conditions for applications.
Safe Use.
Certification—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations.

15.1 6-8 95-8533


EQP2XX0PS(–X) POWER SUPPLIES REDUNDANCY MODULE QUINT–DIODE/40
INPUT VOLTAGE— Temperature Range—
EQP2110PS(-P), EQP2120PS(-B): Auto selectable for Operating: –13°F to +131°F (–25°C to +55°C)
120/220 Vac, –15%, +10%; 60/50 Hz, single phase; (All Applications)
EQP2410PS(-P) Converter: 24 Vdc, –15%, +10%. Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).

INPUT CURRENT— Humidity Range—


5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
EQP2110PS(-P): 3.2 A max @ 120 Vac
1.7 A max @ 220 Vac
Dimensions—
EQP2120PS(-B): 6.6 A max @ 120 Vac in Inches (Centimeters)
3.6 A max @ 220 Vac Width Height Depth
2.4 (6.2) 4 (10.2) 3.3 (8.4)
EQP2410PS(-P): 15.7 A @ max @ 24 Vdc

Output Voltage—
24.5 Vdc nominal, 24.5 to 28.0 Vdc.

OUTPUT CURRENT—
EQP2110PS(-P): 10 A
EQP2120PS(-B): 20 A
EQP2410PS(-P): 10 A

TEMPERATURE RANGE (all models)—


Operating: –13°F to +131°F (–25°C to +55°C)
(All Applications)
Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C)

HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH at 25°C, non-condensing.

DIMENSIONS—
In Inches (Centimeters)
Width Height Depth
EQP2110PS(-P): 3.35(8.5) 5.2(13.0) 5.0(12.5)
EQP2120PS(-B): 3.54(9) 5.2(13.0) 5.0(12.5)
EQP2410PS(-P): 3.2(8.0) 5.2(13.0) 5.0(12.5)

NOTE
Power supplies are designed for DIN rail or
panel mounting (–B or –P suffix).

Certification—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations.
USCG: Refer to Appendix D for details.

15.1 6-9 95-8533


EQ21XXPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR EQ22xxIDC/IDCGF INITIATING
DEVICE CIRCUIT
INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
POWER CONSUMPTION— not cause damage to the equipment.
2.0 watts maximum.
INPUT POWER—
MEASUREMENT RANGE— 4.0 watts maximum.
AC Voltage: 240 vac maximum.
DC Battery Charging Current: 75 amperes maximum. INPUTS—
Two supervised non-incendive digital inputs (sealed
OUTPUT— or unsealed switch or relay contacts). 10 kohm EOL
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 k bps). resistors are required.

TEMPERATURE RANGE— OUTPUTS—


Operating: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C) Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). kbps).

HUMIDITY RANGE— TEMPERATURE RANGE—


5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-4. HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Certification—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations. VIBRATION—
FM 3260.

DIMENSIONS—
9
(22.9) See Figure 6-5.
8.5
(21.6)
5.86
(14.9)
2.25 5.2
J1 J3 (13.2)
(5.7)
2.7
4 (6.9)
(10.2)

B C 4.7
(11.9)

3.46
(8.8)
2.5
(6.4)

A2038

Figure 6-4—Dimensions of Power Supply Monitor in Inches (CM)

6.57
(16.7)

1.28
(3.3)
A2523

Figure 6-5—Dimensions of Tall Cover Junction Box in Inches


(Centimeters)

15.1 6-10 95-8533


Certification— EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC. INPUT VOLTAGE—
FM ®Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
APPROVED
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). not cause damage to the equipment.
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­).
FM ® INPUT POWER—
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4).
1.0 watt maximum.
APPROVED

NEMA/Type 4X.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. OUTPUT—
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. Form C NO/NC relay contact rated 1 ampere
(resistive) at 30 Vdc maximum.
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details. Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
APPROVED

Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X DIMENSIONS—
FM ® T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C) See Figure 6-6.
APPROVED

T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)


T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) Shipping Weight—
IP66 0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)

IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010 CERTIFICATION—


Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C) FFM
M ®
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­).
®

T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C) APPROVED


APPROVED

T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.


Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details.
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.

ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G
Ex nC IIC T4 Gc
FM ® DEMKO 03 ATEX 136222X
APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C

IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X


Ex nC IIC T4 Gc
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C

Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval and


Appendix E for CE Mark details and Special
Conditions for Safe Use.

Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.

2.9 1.2
(7.4) (3.0)

2.1
(5.3)
1.75
(4.4)

A2237

Figure 6-6—Dimensions of Ground Fault Monitor


in Inches (Centimeters)

15.1 6-11 95-8533


EQ22XXDCU AND EQ22XXDCUEX EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT
RELEASE OUTPUT RATING—
INPUT VOLTAGE— 2 amperes at 30 vdc maximum.
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
not cause damage to the equipment. SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
2.0 ma, ±1.0 ma each circuit.
POWER CONSUMPTION—
DCU with toxic gas sensor/transmitter: 95 ma max. INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
DCU with transmitter and combustible gas sensor: not cause damage to the equipment.
180 ma maximum during normal operation, 500 ma NOTE: For deluge and pre-action applications, input
during startup. voltage to the device must be 21 vdc minimum to ensure
proper operation of the connected output device.
INPUTS—
4 - 20 mA analog signal, non-intrusive calibration. INPUT CURRENT—
Standby: 75 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
OUTPUTS—
Alarm: 120 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).

TEMPERATURE RANGE— STATUS OUTPUTS—


Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C). Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
HUMIDITY RANGE— Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

VIBRATION— HUMIDITY RANGE—


FM 6310/6320. 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.

DIMENSIONS— VIBRATION—
See Figure 6-5. Meets MIL SPEC 810C, method 514.2, curve AW.

Certification— DIMENSIONS—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D. See Figure 6-5.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
FM
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
®
Certification—
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­).
APPROVED

FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.


FM ® Class II/III, Div. 1 & 2 (for use with Model STB). Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
NEMA/Type 4X (for use with Model STB).
APPROVED

FM Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.


®

Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. APPROVED


Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­).
FM
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4).
®

CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. APPROVED

NEMA/Type 4X.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
APPROVED
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb EN 60079-29-1 CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
® T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
D

ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM

T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)


APPROVED

Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
IP66 DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details. T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
FM ®

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): APPROVED


T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
The device has an ambient temperature rating for T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
performance of –40°C to +75°C. IP66
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details.
IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C) Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C) T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details. T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details. Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details.
15.1 6-12 95-8533
EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE Certification—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
OUTPUT RATING— Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
FM ®Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
2 amperes at 30 vdc maximum. APPROVED
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
RESPONSE TIME— FM
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­).
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4).
®

Output relay actuates in <0.1 second after


APPROVED

NEMA/Type 4X.
acknowledging an alarm command message. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
3.0 ma ± 2.0ma, each circuit. CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.

EOL RESISTORS —
10 kohm ± 2 kohm. Each circuit must have an EOL ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
APPROVED

resistor. Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb


DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
INPUT VOLTAGE— FM ® T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
APPROVED

T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)


24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
not cause damage to the equipment. IP66
INPUT CURRENT (Excluding Output Current)— Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details.
Standby: 60 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
Alarm: 120 ma maximum at 24 vdc. IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
STATUS OUTPUT—
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
kbps).
Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details.
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). EQ24xxNE NETWORK EXTENDER
INPUT VOLTAGE—
HUMIDITY RANGE— 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. not cause damage to the equipment.

VIBRATION— POWER CONSUMPTION—


Meets MIL SPEC 810C, method 514.2, curve AW. 2.2 watts nominal at 24 vdc, 2.7 watts maximum.

DIMENSIONS— INPUTS/OUTPUTS—
See Figure 6-5. Digital, transformer isolated (78.5k Baud).

TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C)
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).

HUMIDITY—
5 to 95% RH at 70°C.

DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-7.

Certification—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
FM ® Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
APPROVED
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
FM ®
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4­­­­­­­).
APPROVED
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4).
NEMA/Type 4X.

15.1 6-13 95-8533


EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke
& Heat Module
For complete information regarding the ASH Module,
3.77
(9.6) refer to instruction manual number 95-8654.

1.28

COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR


(3.3)

Refer to the Combustible Gas Sensor Specification


5.86
Data sheet, form 90-1041, for specifications.
(14.9)
5.2
(13.2)

2.7 ELECTROCHEMICAL SENSORS


(6.9)

R e f e r t o t h e E l e c t ro c h e m i c a l G a s S e n s o r
Specification Data sheet, for m 90-1079, for
specifications. Electrochemical sensors available
from Det-Tronics include Hydrogen Sulfide, Oxygen,
4.7
(11.9) Carbon Monoxide, Chlorine, Sulfur Dioxide, and
3.46 Nitrogen Dioxide.
(8.8)

EQ21xxPS POWER SUPPLY


A2531
The EQ21xxPS Rectifier / Power Supply has many
inherent advantages such as voltage regulation, high
Figure 6-7—Dimensions of Short Cover Junction Box efficiency, high power factor and short circuit
in Inches (Centimeters)
protection.

These chargers provide separate adjustable voltages


for floating or equalizing lead or nickel-cadmium
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. cells. An equalize switch is located on the front panel
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. of the
charger for manual activation or a multi-mode
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. electronic timer can be used for automatic activation.

Steady state output voltage remains within +/- 1/2% of


ATEX: 0539 II 2 G.
FM
APPROVED

the setting from no load to full load and for AC input


Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb voltages within +/- 10% of the nominal input voltage.
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X The power supply is internally filtered to be no greater
M T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
®
than 32dBrn (“C” message weighting) and 30
ED
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) millivolts RMS for all conditions on input voltage and
IP66 output load with or without batteries connected. This
allows the A36D to be used as a battery eliminator.
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details.

IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010


Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)

Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.


Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details.

15.1 6-14 95-8533


APPENDIX A

FM Approval Description

hazardous locations

• Refer to Figures A-1 and A-2 for System Classification details.


• EQxxxxEM versions rated nonincendive for Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).

fire detection & releasing

• National Fire Alarm Code performance verified per ANSI/NFPA 72-2010. Refer to Table A-1 for supervision
characteristics.
• Refer to the Model X3301, X5200, X2200 and X9800 manuals (see Table 2-4) for further FM flame performance
details. Additional 2 second response time applied for system communication.
• Models EQ3700 Series and EQ22xxARM Series are Approved as agent releasing circuits and are Approved for use
with the following automatic deluge and pre-action solenoids:

FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model


B ASCO T8210A107
D ASCO 8210G207
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
H Viking 11601

gas detection

• Combustible Gas Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320.
Accuracy: ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51% to 100% LFL. For the Model PIRECL, refer to the
PIRECL manual (form number 95-8526) for further FM gas performance details.

NOTE: Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K factors are not FM verified.

• H2S Toxic Gas Performance verified 0 to 20, 50 or 100 ppm per FM requirements. Accuracy: ±2 ppm from 0 to 20
ppm, ±10% of concentration from 21 to 100 ppm. Models C7064E4012 and C7064E5012 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
Sensors Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615. Model
C7064E5014 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Sensors Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous
(Classified) Locations per FM 3615. Operating temperature limits are –40°C to +40°C.

NOTE: Sensor cross sensitivity has not been verified by FM.

• Calibration of the above listed sensors has been FM verified using the respective EQ22xxDCU, EQ22xxDCUEX,
and PIRECL with the Det-Tronics 225130-001 (50% LFL methane) and/or 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The EQ22xxDCU Series can be used with any FM Approved 4-20 ma device.

NOTE
FM Approval of the 4-20 ma input does not include or imply approval of the gas detection apparatus such as
sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain FM Approval of the system, all
4-20 ma gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be FM Approved.
15.1 A-1 95-8533
NOTE
FM Approval allows the presence and operation of serial/Ethernet communications software in the Controller
(MODBUS TCP/IP, Allen Bradley protocols, etc.); however, the communications functions are not included in the
Approval.

Table A-1—Circuit Classifications

Signaling Path NFPA 72: 2010 Supervision


Local Operating Network (LON) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class X
Power Distribution Module, Input Power Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.3.
Power Distribution Module, Controller Power Output Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.3.
Power Distribution Module, Field Device Power Output Supervised. Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72,
Cl. 10.17.1.
Power Distribution Module, Local Field Device Power Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Power Supply Monitor, Input Power Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.3.
Power Supply Monitor, Output Power Supervised (via Controller for opens).
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1.
Power Supply Monitor, Charger Supervised. Loss of charger per NFPA Cl. 10.5.9.6.
Power Supply Monitor, Battery Supervised. Loss of battery per NFPA Cl. 10.17.3.
Controller, Digital Input Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, Relay Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, Trouble Relay Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, 232 Expansion Output (SIL or Non-SIL) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, Ethernet Expansion Output (SIL or Non-SIL) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, SLC485 Expansion Output, including Class B (Single Channel Single-Mode Fiber)
optional fiber optic equipment (SIL or Non-SIL) Class X (Multi-Mode Fiber or Dual Channel Single-Mode Fiber
or Dual Channel Wire)
Redundant Controller Connector, RS-232 (SIL or Non-SIL) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Relay Module, Output Unsupervised, for connection with ancillary equipment only.
Enhanced Discrete I/O, Input (software configurable, Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
SIL or Non-SIL) & #10.17.1.9.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class A or Class B
Enhanced Discrete I/O, Output (software configurable, Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
SIL or Non-SIL) & #10.17.1.9.
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class A or Class B
Supervised Solenoids (Class A or Class B):
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1.
Group B: ASCO T8210A107
Group D: ASCO 8210G207
Group E: Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Group F: Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Group G: Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Group H: Viking 11601

15.1 A-2 95-8533


Table A-1—Circuit Classifications-Continued

Signaling Path NFPA 72: 2010 Supervision


Discrete I/O, Input (software configurable) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8 &
#10.17.1.9.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B
Discrete I/O, Output (software configurable) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8 &
#10.17.1.9.
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class B
Supervised Solenoids:
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1.
Group B: ASCO T8210A107
Group D: ASCO 8210G207
Group E: Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Group F: Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Group G: Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Group H: Viking 11601
Analog Input Module (SIL or Non-SIL) Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B
IDC Input Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B
Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8 &
IDCGF Input (Channel 2 only)
#10.17.1.9.
SAM Output Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class B

ARM Output Supervised Solenoids:


Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1
Group B: ASCO T8210A107
Group D: ASCO 8210G207
Group E: Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Group F: Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Group G: Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Group H: Viking 11601
ASH Loop (Smoke & Heat Loop) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class A or Class B (single spur)
ASH Loop (Smoke & Heat Loop) with Isolators Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class X
ASH Loop (Smoke & Heat Loop) with Isolators Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class B (single spur)
ASH - Addressable Smoke and Heat Module Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1,
Input (software configurable) Exception #10.17.1.8 & #10.17.1.9.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class A
ASH - Addressable Smoke and Heat Module
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class A (Apollo)
Input - Smoke detector inputs
ASH - Addressable Smoke and Heat Module Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1,
Output (software configurable) Exception #10.17.1.8 & #10.17.1.9.
Notification Appliance Circuit (Apollo): Class A

15.1 A-3 95-8533


EQPSS supervising System
• National Fire Alarm Code performance verified per ANSI/NFPA 72-2002. Refer to Figures A-2 and B-2 for EQPSS
Supervising System architecture.
• Det-Tronics only to integrate proprietary EQPSS Supervising System per Det-Tronics Procedures 5072 and 5073.

EQP SYSTEM MODEL 000523-009 & 000523-010


• The System consists of:
1 x EQP2120PS-B Power Supply, primary; 1 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-009)
2 x EQP2410PS-P Converter, secondary; 0 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-010)
2 x QUINT–DIODE/40 Redundancy module; 0 x EQ3710AIM Module & 1 x EQ3730EDIO Module (000523-009)
1 x EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor 2 x EQ3710AIM Modules & 2 x EQ3730EDIO Modules (000523-010)
• The System is mounted within 60H x 36W x 16D Stainless Steel (type 316), NRTL labeled NEMA 4X rated
enclosure. The enclosure shall be lockable by key lock or padlock.
• EQP system models 000523-009 & 000523-010 are suitable for Cl I, Div. 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4); Cl I, Zone 2,
GRP IIC (T4) Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Tamb = –20°C to +49°C.
• Modifications to enclosure (such as conduit entry holes, windows etc.) are permitted when implemented by the
manufacturer of the enclosure.

15.1 A-4 95-8533


15.1
ON NEXT ECO: ADD 3900G INFO,
SEE 007546-001 FOR WORDING.
PER LAUREL 01/30/13

A-5A-5
Figure A-1 (System Drawing 007545-001T)

95-8533
95-8533
15.1
ON NEXT ECO: ADD 3900G INFO,
SEE 007546-001 FOR WORDING.
PER LAUREL 01/30/13

A-6
Figure A-2 (System Drawing 007545-001)

95-8533
APPENDIX B

CSA international certification Description

hazardous locations

• Refer to Figures B-1 and B-2 for System Classification details.


• EQxxxxEM versions rated Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).

gas detection

• Combustible Gas Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per CSA C22.2 No. 152.
Accuracy: ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51% to 100% LFL. For the Model PIRECL, refer to the
PIRECL manual (form number 95-8526) for further CSA gas performance details.

NOTE: Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K factors are not CSA verified.

• Calibration of the devices has been CSA verified using the respective EQ22xxDCU, EQ22xxDCUEX and PIRECL
Series with the Det-Tronics 225130-001 (50% LFL methane) and 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The EQ22xxDCU Series can be used with any CSA Certified 4-20 ma device.

NOTE
CSA Certification of the 4-20 ma input does not include or imply approval of the gas detection apparatus such
as sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain CSA Certification of the
system, all 4-20 ma gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be CSA Certified.

NOTE
CSA Certification allows the presence and operation of serial/Ethernet communications software in the
Controller (MODBUS TCP/IP, Allen Bradley protocols, etc.); however, the communications functions are not
included in the Certification.

15.1 B-1 95-8533


15.1
B-2
Figure B-1 (Drawing 007546-001P)

95-8533
15.1
B-3
Figure B-2 (Drawing 007546-001)

95-8533
APPENDIX C
ATEX and IECEx Certification

ATEX and IECEx Certification Details


The Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection / Releasing System was tested and certified to hazardous
location and combustible gas performance standards. Refer to Figure C-1 for system classification details.

The ATEX/IECEx certified Eagle Quantum Premier System field devices EQ22..., EQ24... and EQ25... are in
compliance with the following standards:
– IEC 60079-0: 2011
– EN 60079-0: 2012
– IEC/EN 60079-1: 2010
– EN 60079-29-1: 2007
– EN 60079-29-4: 2010 (EQ3XXX Only)

The ATEX/IECEx certified Ex n modules of the EQP system are in compliance with the following standards:
– IEC 60079-0: 2011
– EN 60079-0: 2012
– IEC/EN 60079-15: 2010
– EN 60079-29-1: 2007
– EN 60079-29-4: 2010 (EQ3XXX Only)

For all ATEX/IECEx certified Ex n modules in the EQP system, the following Special Conditions for Safe Use apply:
The ambient temperature range is limited for EQ3XXX:
– From –40°C to +70°C if any of the output relays 1-7 (terminals 21-41) is used (energized).
– From –40°C to +80°C if all output relays 1-7 (terminals 21-41) remain open-contacted and de-energized.
For compliance to EN 60079-29-1/-4, the relevant Ex n module must be used with gas detection apparatus that are
certified for compliance to EN60079-29-1/-4 and that provide a suitable linear 4-20 mA output, relay contact output or
LON communication output relative to the %LFL of the available gas in the area of the gas detection apparatus. See
the Manual for details on the required connection parameters.
The EQP Ex n modules shall be used in an area of no more than pollution degree 2 conforming to IEC 60664-1, and
in an enclosure with a tool removable cover that complies with all relevant requirements of IEC/EN 60079-15, rated at
least IP54, and shall be connected to supply circuits where the rated voltage cannot be exceeded by 40% caused by
transient disturbances.

15.1 C-1 95-8533


Performance Testing to EN 60079-29-1: 2007 and EN 60079-29-4: 2010
The measuring function of the EQ3XXX Controller, according to Annex II paragraph 1.5.5, 1.5.6 and 1.5.7 of the
Directive 94/9/EC, was covered in this Type Examination Certificate in the following configurations:
1. Controller Model EQ3XXX with EQ3710AIM or EQ3700DCIO or EQ3730EDIO or EQ22XXDCU (tested as a stand-
alone control unit with a calibrated linear 4-20mA simulator input signal or relay contacts (as applicable).
2. Controller Model EQ3XXX with EQ22xxDCUEX and STB and CGS (tested as a gas detection system with methane
applied to the CGS).
3. Controller Model EQ3XXX with CTB and PIRECL (tested as a gas detection system with methane applied to the
PIRECL).
4. Controller Model EQ3XXX with UD10/DCU Emulator and CGS Conditioning Board, in combination with the
Det‑Tronics gas sensor Model CGS (tested as a gas detection system with methane applied to the CGS).
5. Controller Model EQ3XXX with OPECL.

For the ATEX certified Eagle Quantum Premier System field devices EQ22XXDCU and EQ22XXDCUEX, the
following Special Condition for Safe Use applies:
The field devices EQ22XXDCU and EQ22XXDCUEX have an ambient temperature rating for performance of –40°C to
+75°C.

Important Note
All applied gas detectors must be ATEX certified to EN60079-29-1/-4 and the configuration must comply with
the gas performance parameters stated in the Installation Manual.

15.1 C-2 95-8533


15.1
C-3
95-8533
Figure C-1 (Drawing 007547-001)
APPENDIX D

Eagle Quantum Premier System

MARINE APPLICATIONS

U.S. COAST GUARD APPROVAL Number 161.002/49/0

Approved System Description


Refer to Table D-1 for a complete list of USCG approved equipment.

Table D-1— List of Approved Equipment

Equip. No. Manufacturer Equipment type Series/Model Description

EQ3XXXP N(C) N(S) W(T)-C, panel mount only;


installed inside Rittal cabinet or equivalent NEMA 12
1 Det-Tronics EQ3XXX Controller
enclosure in controlled environments;
NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
Optional module used in the Controller Redundancy
EQ3LTM configuration, installed inside Rittal cabinet or equivalent
2 Det-Tronics
LON Termination Module NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ3710D(P) W, installed inside Rittal cabinet or
EQ3710AIM
3 Det-Tronics equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
Analog Input Module
NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ3720D(P) W, installed inside Rittal cabinet or
EQ3720RM
4 Det-Tronics equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
Relay Module
NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ3730EDIO EQ3730D(P) W(T); installed inside Rittal cabinet or
5 Det-Tronics Enhanced Discrete equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
Input/Output Module NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ3750ASHP W; panel mount only, installed inside Rittal
EQ3750ASH Addressable
6 Det-Tronics cabinet or equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled
Smoke & Heat Module
environments; NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ24xxNE Network EQ245(6) 3NE;
7 Det-Tronics
Extender Module Enclosure material: 5 – Aluminum, 6 –SS.
EQ22xxDCUEX Digital EQ225(6)3DCUEX;
8 Det-Tronics Communication Unit, Enclosure material: 5 – Aluminum, 6 –SS.
Combustible (Uses CGS Gas Sensor)
CGS Combustible Gas CGSS1A6C2R1X
9 Det-Tronics
Sensor (Used with the EQ22xxDCUEX)
PIRECLAx4
10 Det-Tronics PointWatch Hydrocarbon PIRECLA (1) 4 A (B) 1 (2) W (T) 1 (2)
Gas Detector
PIRECLAx4
PointWatch Hydrocar- PIRECLA (1) 4 A (B) 1 (2) W (T) 1 (2);
11 Det-Tronics
bon Gas Detector “Duct with DEC Q900C1001 Duct Mount kit
Mount”
Model GTXS N (M) W 4 (5) Transmitter
with Model GTSH2S 20P (50P,100P) Sensor
GT3000 or
12 Det-Tronics
Toxic Gas Detector Model GTSO2 25V Sensor
or
Model GTSCO 100P (500P) Sensor

15.1 D-1 95-8533


Table D-1— List of Approved Equipment (Continued)

Equip. No. Manufacturer Equipment type Series/Model Description

13 Det-Tronics UD10 Universal Display UD10A (S) 5N (5M) 25 (28) W 2


X3301 Multispectrum X3301A (S) 4N (4M) 11 (13, 14, 23) W (T) 1 (2) ;
14 Det-Tronics
Flame Detector with Q9033A Al (Q9033B SS) swivel
X3302 Multispectrum X3302A (S) 4N (4M) 11 (13, 14, 23) W 1 (2);
15 Det-Tronics
Flame Detector with Q9033A Al (Q9033B SS) swivel
STB Sensor STB4 (5) A (S) 2N (2U, 3N, 5N, 6N) W
16 Det-Tronics
Termination Box (Used with the Fenwal DAF Vertical Heat Detector)
EQ2220GFM Ground EQ2220GFM is installed in the same enclosure
17 Det-Tronics
Fault Monitor with EQ3XXX Controller
EQP2120PS-B Model Quint PS-100-240VAC/24VDC/20;
Phoenix Contact
18 Power Supply panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany)
(Discontinued) with EQ3XXX Controller
EQP2120PS-B Model QUINT PS-1AC/24 DC/20
Phoenix Contact
19 Power Supply panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany)
(Replacement) with EQ3XXX Controller
Model QUINT PS-100-240 AC/24 DC/10EX
Phoenix Contact EQP2110PS-P
20 panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany) Power Supply
with EQ3XXX Controller
Model QUINT PS-24 DC/24 DC/10
Phoenix Contact EQP2410PS-P
21 panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany) Converter
with EQ3XXX Controller
Model QUINT-DIODE/40; panel mount only;
Phoenix Contact QUINT-DIODE/40Diode
22 installed in the same enclosure with EQ3XXX Controller
(Germany) Redundancy Module
and Approved Phoenix Power Supplies
Model 12-E27121-020-xx rated 140°F (60°C) {160°F
Kidde-Fenwal DAF
23 (71°C), 190°F (88°C), 225°F (107°C)};
(Fenwal) Vertical Heat Detector
used with STB Sensor Termination Box, item 15
THD-7052
24 Fenwal Uses 2-wire base 2WRLT.
Heat Detector
CPD-7054 Ionization
25 Fenwal Uses 2-wire base 2WRLT.
Type Smoke Detector
PSD-7157 and
PSD-7157D
26 Fenwal Uses 2-wire base 2WRLT.
Photoelectric Type
Smoke Detectors
27 Fenwal MT-12/24-R Horn 24 V dc model; installed in Fenwal IOB-R box.
MTWP-2475W – FR Multitone Weatherproof Horn-Strobe;
28 Fenwal
Horn/Strobe installed in Fenwal IOB-R box.
Model 84-330001-002 pull station;
Manual Call Stations
29 Fenwal uses Fenwal SGB-32S interior surface mount backbox
Series 3300
(compatible mounting with B-11).
RA-911 Remote Remote indicator for use with Fenwal Heat
30 Fenwal
Indicator or Smoke detectors.
Manual Fire Alarm Call
31 MEDC (UK) Model PB-UL-4C-6C-4-DC-D-7-R call point
Point PB Range
Uses CCH EAJC26 conduit outlet box with cover,
32* Cooper Crouse Hinds CCH ETH 2416 Horn
3/4 NPT hub size.

*Horn item 32 is for use in gas applications only.

15.1 D-2 95-8533


Applied Strobe AST-4-10-30-DC-CL-CM-75-ULC;
33 AST-4-1030 Strobe
Technology (Canada) with clear lenses
SL-2000-P; installed in Hoffman LWC204015SS6
Air Products & SL-2000-P
34 NEMA 4X enclosure; uses Apollo 55000-328A
Controls Duct Smoke Detector
photoelectric head w/ RW-268A base.
Apollo Fire Discovery Ionization Apollo P/N 58000-550NA
35
Detectors Ltd. Smoke Detector (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire Discovery Optical Apollo P/N 58000-650NA
36
Detectors Ltd. Smoke Detector (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire Discovery Multisensor Apollo P/N 58000-750NA
37
Detectors Ltd. Detector (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire Apollo P/N 58000-450NA
38 Discovery Heat Detector
Detectors Ltd. (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire XP95A Sounder Control
39 Apollo P/N 55000-825NA
Detectors Ltd. Module
Apollo Fire
40 Mini Switch Monitor Apollo P/N 55000-765NA*
Detectors Ltd.
Apollo Fire Priority Mini Switch
41 Apollo P/N 55000-765NA*
Detectors Ltd. Monitor

* The device type depends on the priority switch setting on the device.
NA = North American Approvals

15.1 D-3 95-8533


IMPORTANT
The EQP2120PS-B and EQP2110PS-P Power Supplies provide EQP System devices with power from input
supply 120 to 220 Vac. The EQP2120PS-B and EQP2110PS-P Power Supplies are used in pairs where primary
source of input supply is connected to one and the secondary source is connected to the other. Use of these
power supplies may provide the source of the secondary supply. The EQP2410PS-P Converter provides the
EQP system with power from input supply 24 Vdc and provides the source if secondary supply only.

note
The customer may provide other sources of the secondary supply such as secondary source batteries, their
supervision or charging, or UPS. Per NFPA 72-2010 requirements, such power supply related requirements must
be separately provided for and be accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

Hazardous Locations
Refer to Figure D-1 (Drawing 007545-001) for System Classification details.

System Specification
EQP2120PS-B POWER SUPPLY (Discontinued)—
Number of units: 16 (8 pairs) max
Input voltage: 120 – 220 Vac, -15%, +10%, 60/50 Hz single phase
Output voltage: Nominal– 24.5 Vdc ± 1% Vdc
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: Vout = 24.5 Vdc: 4.9 Amps @ 120 Vac
2.9 Amps @ 220 Vac.
Vout = 28.0 Vdc: 5.6 Amps @ 120 Vac
3.2 Amps @ 220 Vac.
Output current, each: 20 A

EQP2120PS-B POWER SUPPLY (Replacement)—


Number of units: 16 (8 pairs) max
Input voltage: 120 – 220 Vac, -15%, +10%, 60/50 Hz single phase
Output voltage: Nominal– 24.5 Vdc ± 1% Vdc
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: 6.6 A max @120 Vac
3.6 A max @220 Vac.
Output current, each: 20 A

15.1 D-4 95-8533


EQP2110PS-P POWER SUPPLY—
Number of units: 16 (8 pairs) max
Input voltage: 120 – 220 Vac, -15% +10%, 60/50 Hz single phase
Output voltage: Nominal– 24.5 Vdc ± 1% Vdc
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: 3.2 A max @120 Vac
1.7 A max @220 Vac
Output current, each: 10 A

EQP2410PS-P Converter—
Number of units: 16 (8 pairs) max
Input voltage: 24 Vdc, -15%, +10%
Output voltage: Nominal– 24.5 Vdc ± 1% Vdc
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: 15.7 A max @ 24 Vdc.
Output current, each: 10 A

QUINT-Diode/40 redundancy module


Number of units: 8 (2 Power Supplies can be connected to each module) max
Input voltage: 24.5….28.0 Vdc

IMPORTANT
The output voltage is adjustable. An even current distribution must be ensured by precisely setting all power
supply units that are operated in parallel to the same output voltage ±10 mV.

IMPORTANT
To ensure symmetrical current distribution it is recommended that all cable connections from all power supply
units/diode redundancy modules to the power distribution bus are the same length and have the same cross
section.

POWER REQUIREMENT—
Refer to Section 6 of this manual and individual device manuals for details.

NOTE
The Power Supplies, Converter, and Diode Redundancy Module electrical specifications for EQP marine
applications represent a reduction in the rating range with respect to that specified by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s published electrical specifications may be viewed as reference only.

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY RANGE—


See Table D-2 for details.

NOTE
The operating temperature and relative humidity specification of EQP System components including Power
Supplies, Converter, and Diode Redundancy Module in EQP marine applications represent a reduction in the
rating range for some components and an increase in the rating range for other components with respect to
that specified by their manufacturers. The manufacturer’s published operating temperature and relative humidity
specifications may be viewed as reference only.

15.1 D-5 95-8533


INSTALLATION—
The EQP2120PS-B Power Supply, EQP2110PS-P Power Supply, EQP2410PS-P Converter, and Diode
Redundancy Module are Panel mounted and intended to be installed within the same cabinet as the EQ3XXX
Controller of the EQP System. Note: Ensure sufficient convection. Refer to Phoenix Contact manuals as listed
below for additional installation and mounting details. For other EQP System components installation, operation
and maintenance refer to appropriate sections of this manual and to individual device manuals.

Note
SHCS # 10-24 SST screws are recommended for the Power Supply and Diode Redundancy Module panel
mounting.

Note
Terminal End Brackets DEC P/N 000133-517 are recommended for use with EQ371(2)(3)0D (DIN rail mount)
and EQ2220GFM Modules.

Power Supply Supervision—


The EQP2120PS-B and EQP2110-P Power Supplies, and EQP2410PS-P Converter shall be monitored for
Trouble. The power supply provides an internal relay contact DC OK signal output, floating. All power supply unit
relay contacts shall be connected in series and connected to the EQ3730EDIO input. A Trouble signal will be
initiated in case of a power supply failure. The Trouble signal will not identify the specific power supply unit that
failed. See Figure D-2 for connecting diagram.

EQP SYSTEM MODEL 000523-009 & 000523-010


• The System consists of:
1 x EQP2120PS-B Power Supply, primary
2 x EQP2410PS-P Converter, secondary
2 x QUINT–DIODE/40 Redundancy module
1 x EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor
1 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-009)
0 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-010)
0 x EQ3710AIM Module & 1 x EQ3730EDIO Module (000523-009)
2 x EQ3710AIM Modules & 2 x EQ3730EDIO Modules (000523-010)
• The System is mounted within 60H x 36W x 16D Stainless Steel (type 316), NRTL labeled NEMA 4X rated
enclosure. The enclosure shall be lockable by key lock or padlock.
• EQP system models 000523-009 & 000523-010 are suitable for Cl I, Div. 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4); Cl I, Zone 2,
GRP IIC (T4) Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Tamb = –20°C to +49°C.
• Modifications to enclosure (such as conduit entry holes, windows etc.) are permitted when implemented by the
manufacturer of the enclosure.

15.1 D-6 95-8533


ORDERING INFORMATION

POWER SUPPLY, DIODE, CONTROLLER, DUCT MOUNT KIT


DEC Part Number Model Description
Phoenix Contact
EQP2120PS-B
009929-001 QUINT–PS-100-240AC/24DC/20
(Discontinued)
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
EQP2120PS-B
010988-001 QUINT–PS-1AC/24DC/20
(Replacement)
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
010985-001 EQP2110PS-P QUINT–PS-100-240AC/24DC/10EX
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
010892-001 EQP2410PS-P QUINT–PS-24DC/24DC/10
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
009934-001 Diode Redundancy Module QUINT–DIODE/40
Panel Mount
EQP System Controller,
007609-269 EQ3XXXPCSW-C
panel mount
009931-001 Q900C1001 Duct Mount Kit
000523-009 000523-009 See description on page D-6
000523-010 000523-010 See description on page D-6

For other USCG Approved EQP System components, refer to Table D-1 or contact Det-Tronics Customer Service.

Refer to Section 3 of this manual for determining power requirements.

15.1 D-7 95-8533


Table D-2—Temperature and Humidity Ranges

Temperature & RH Non-Condensing


Installation Category
Installation in
Equip. No. Product consoles,
Controlled housings, etc.; Weather exposed
environment Non-weather areas (Salt mist)
protected or cold
locations
EQ3XXX Controller
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
1* with or without
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ3LTM Module
EQ3710AIM 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
2*
Analog Input Module 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ3720RM 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
3*
Relay Module 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ3730EDIO
Enhanced 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
4*
DiscreteInput/Output 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Module
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
5 EQ3750ASH
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ24xxNE
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
6 Network Extender Mod-
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
ule
EQ22xxDCUEX Digital
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
7 Communication Unit,
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Combustible
CGS Combustible Gas 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
8
Sensor 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
PIRECLAx4
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
9 PointWatch Hydrocar-
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
bon Gas Detector
PIRECLAx4
PointWatch 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
10
Hydrocarbon Gas 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Detector “Duct Mount”
GT3000 0°C to +50°C -20°C to +50°C -20°C to +50°C
11
Toxic Gas Detector 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
12 UD10 Universal Display
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
X3301
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
13 Multispectrum Flame
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Detector
X3302
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
14 Multispectrum Flame
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Detector
STB 0°C to +55vC -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
15
Sensor Termination Box 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH

15.1 D-8 95-8533


Table D-2—Temperature and Humidity Ranges (Continued)

Temperature & RH Non-Condensing


Installation Category
Installation in
Equip. No. Product consoles,
Controlled housings, etc.; Weather exposed
environment Non-weather areas (Salt mist)
protected or cold
locations
EQ2220GFM 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
16*
Ground Fault Monitor 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQP2120PS-B 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
17*
Power supply 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQP2110PS-P 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
18*
Power supply 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQP2410PS-P 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
19*
Converter 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
QUINT-
DIODE/40Diode 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +55°C
20*
redundancy 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
module
DAF Vertical Heat 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
21
Detector 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
THD-7052 0°C to +55°C
22 N/A N/A
Heat Detector 5-95%RH
CPD-7054
0°C to +55°C
23 Ionization Type N/A N/A
5-95%RH
Smoke Detector
PSD-7157 and
PSD-7157D 0°C to +55°C
24 N/A N/A
Photoelectric Type 5-95%RH
Smoke Detectors
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C
25 MT-12/24-R Horn N/A
5-95%RH 5-95%RH
MTWP-2475W – FR 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
26 N/A
Horn/Strobe 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Manual Call
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C
27 Stations N/A
5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Series 3300
RA-911 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C
28 N/A
Remote Indicator 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Manual Fire
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
29 Alarm Call Point
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
PB Range
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
30 CCH ETH 2416 Horn
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH

15.1 D-9 95-8533


Table D-2—Temperature and Humidity Ranges (Continued)

Temperature & RH Non-Condensing


Installation Category
Installation in
Equip. No. Product consoles,
Controlled housings, etc.; Weather exposed
environment Non-weather areas (Salt mist)
protected or cold
locations
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
31 AST-4-1030 Strobe
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
SL-2000-P Duct 0°C to +55°C 0°C to +70°C 0°C to +70°C
32
Smoke Detector 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Discovery Ionization 5°C to +55°C
33 N/A N/A
Smoke Detector 5-95%RH
Discovery Optical 5°C to +55°C
34 N/A N/A
Smoke Detector 5-95%RH
Discovery Multisensor 5°C to +55°C
35 N/A N/A
Detector 5-95%RH
5°C to +55°C
36 Discovery Heat Detector N/A N/A
5-95%RH
XP95A Sounder Control 5°C to +55°C
37 N/A N/A
Module 5-95%RH
5°C to +55°C
38 Mini Switch Monitor N/A N/A
5-95%RH
Priority Mini Switch 5°C to +55°C
39 N/A N/A
Monitor 5-95%RH

* For use in controlled environment, install in NEMA 12 rated enclosure or cabinet.


For use in non-weather protected, cold and salt mist exposed areas, install in NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure or cabinet.

15.1 D-10 95-8533


15.1
D-11
Figure D1— System Drawing 007545-001

95-8533
15.1
TO EDIO

PS 1 PS PS PS n
– – – –
L PHOENIX L PHOENIX L PHOENIX L PHOENIX
QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS –
N N N N
+ + + +
DC + DC + DC + DC +
13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK
A2555

D-12
Note: Contacts are closed during normal operation. The circuit shall be wired to an input on the EQP system (EDIO).
In Logic, the selected input must be inverted and used to activate an alarm trigger gate, which initiates a
fault message on the Controller and activates the fault relay output.

No supervision is necessary, since the EDIO modules must be installed in the same cabinet with EQP21X0PS
and EQP2410PS.

Figure D-2—Power Supply and Converter Relays Wired in Series for Trouble Monitoring (up to 16 Power Supplies/Converters)

95-8533
APPENDIX E

CE Mark

EMC Directive 2004/108/EC details


The Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System was tested and found to be compliant with
EN61000-6-2, EN61000-6-4, EN50130-4, and EN50270. The following considerations must be given for installation
of the Eagle Quantum Premier system.

• For shielded cable installed in conduit, attach the wire shields to the “shield” connections on the terminal blocks, or
to the earth ground on the case.

• For installations without conduit, use double shielded cable. Terminate the outer shield to the earth ground on the
case. Terminate the inner shield to the “shield” connection on the terminal blocks.

Additional Directives

• ATEX Directive: 94/9/EC


Refer to Appendix C for details.

• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC

• WEEE Directive: 2002/96/EC

15.1 B-1
E-1 95-8533
APPENDIX F

Rocker Switch Table


Node Rocker Switch Node Rocker Switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 X O O O O O O O 61 X O X X X X O O
2 O X O O O O O O 62 O X X X X X O O
3 X X O O O O O O 63 X X X X X X O O
4 O O X O O O O O 64 O O O O O O X O
5 X O X O O O O O 65 X O O O O O X O
6 O X X O O O O O 66 O X O O O O X O
7 X X X O O O O O 67 X X O O O O X O
8 O O O X O O O O 68 O O X O O O X O
9 X O O X O O O O 69 X O X O O O X O
10 O X O X O O O O 70 O X X O O O X O

11 X X O X O O O O 71 X X X O O O X O
12 O O X X O O O O 72 O O O X O O X O
13 X O X X O O O O 73 X O O X O O X O
14 O X X X O O O O 74 O X O X O O X O
15 X X X X O O O O 75 X X O X O O X O
16 O O O O X O O O 76 O O X X O O X O
17 X O O O X O O O 77 X O X X O O X O
18 O X O O X O O O 78 O X X X O O X O
19 X X O O X O O O 79 X X X X O O X O
20 O O X O X O O O 80 O O O O X O X O

21 X O X O X O O O 81 X O O O X O X O
22 O X X O X O O O 82 O X O O X O X O
23 X X X O X O O O 83 X X O O X O X O
24 O O O X X O O O 84 O O X O X O X O
25 X O O X X O O O 85 X O X O X O X O
26 O X O X X O O O 86 O X X O X O X O
27 X X O X X O O O 87 X X X O X O X O
28 O O X X X O O O 88 O O O X X O X O
29 X O X X X O O O 89 X O O X X O X O
30 O X X X X O O O 90 O X O X X O X O

31 X X X X X O O O 91 X X O X X O X O
32 O O O O O X O O 92 O O X X X O X O
33 X O O O O X O O 93 X O X X X O X O
34 O X O O O X O O 94 O X X X X O X O
35 X X O O O X O O 95 X X X X X O X O
36 O O X O O X O O 96 O O O O O X X O
37 X O X O O X O O 97 X O O O O X X O
38 O X X O O X O O 98 O X O O O X X O
39 X X X O O X O O 99 X X O O O X X O
40 O O O X O X O O 100 O O X O O X X O

41 X O O X O X O O 101 X O X O O X X O
42 O X O X O X O O 102 O X X O O X X O
43 X X O X O X O O 103 X X X O O X X O
44 O O X X O X O O 104 O O O X O X X O
45 X O X X O X O O 105 X O O X O X X O
46 O X X X O X O O 106 O X O X O X X O
47 X X X X O X O O 107 X X O X O X X O
48 O O O O X X O O 108 O O X X O X X O
49 X O O O X X O O 109 X O X X O X X O
50 O X O O X X O O 110 O X X X O X X O

51 X X O O X X O O 111 X X X X O X X O
52 O O X O X X O O 112 O O O O X X X O
53 X O X O X X O O 113 X O O O X X X O
54 O X X O X X O O 114 O X O O X X X O
55 X X X O X X O O 115 X X O O X X X O
56 O O O X X X O O 116 O O X O X X X O
57 X O O X X X O O 117 X O X O X X X O
58 O X O X X X O O 118 O X X O X X X O
59 X X O X X X O O 119 X X X O X X X O
60 O O X X X X O O 120 O O O X X X X O

15.1 F-1 95-8533


Rocker Switch Table
Node Rocker Switch Node Rocker Switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

121 X O O X X X X O 191 X X X X X X O X
122 O X O X X X X O 192 O O O O O O X X
123 X X O X X X X O 193 X O O O O O X X
124 O O X X X X X O 194 O X O O O O X X
125 X O X X X X X O 195 X X O O O O X X
126 O X X X X X X O 196 O O X O O O X X
127 X X X X X X X O 197 X O X O O O X X
128 O O O O O O O X 198 O X X O O O X X
129 X O O O O O O X 199 X X X O O O X X
130 O X O O O O O X 200 O O O X O O X X

131 X X O O O O O X 201 X O O X O O X X
132 O O X O O O O X 202 O X O X O O X X
133 X O X O O O O X 203 X X O X O O X X
134 O X X O O O O X 204 O O X X O O X X
135 X X X O O O O X 205 X O X X O O X X
136 O O O X O O O X 206 O X X X O O X X
137 X O O X O O O X 207 X X X X O O X X
138 O X O X O O O X 208 O O O O X O X X
139 X X O X O O O X 209 X O O O X O X X
140 O O X X O O O X 210 O X O O X O X X

141 X O X X O O O X 211 X X O O X O X X
142 O X X X O O O X 212 O O X O X O X X
143 X X X X O O O X 213 X O X O X O X X
144 O O O O X O O X 214 O X X O X O X X
145 X O O O X O O X 215 X X X O X O X X
146 O X O O X O O X 216 O O O X X O X X
147 X X O O X O O X 217 X O O X X O X X
148 O O X O X O O X 218 O X O X X O X X
149 X O X O X O O X 219 X X O X X O X X
150 O X X O X O O X 220 O O X X X O X X

151 X X X O X O O X 221 X O X X X O X X
152 O O O X X O O X 222 O X X X X O X X
153 X O O X X O O X 223 X X X X X O X X
154 O X O X X O O X 224 O O O O O X X X
155 X X O X X O O X 225 X O O O O X X X
156 O O X X X O O X 226 O X O O O X X X
157 X O X X X O O X 227 X X O O O X X X
158 O X X X X O O X 228 O O X O O X X X
159 X X X X X O O X 229 X O X O O X X X
160 O O O O O X O X 230 O X X O O X X X

161 X O O O O X O X 231 X X X O O X X X
162 O X O O O X O X 232 O O O X O X X X
163 X X O O O X O X 233 X O O X O X X X
164 O O X O O X O X 234 O X O X O X X X
165 X O X O O X O X 235 X X O X O X X X
166 O X X O O X O X 236 O O X X O X X X
167 X X X O O X O X 237 X O X X O X X X
168 O O O X O X O X 238 O X X X O X X X
169 X O O X O X O X 239 X X X X O X X X
170 O X O X O X O X 240 O O O O X X X X

171 X X O X O X O X 241 X O O O X X X X
172 O O X X O X O X 242 O X O O X X X X
173 X O X X O X O X 243 X X O O X X X X
174 O X X X O X O X 244 O O X O X X X X
175 X X X X O X O X 245 X O X O X X X X
176 O O O O X X O X 246 O X X O X X X X
177 X O O O X X O X 247 X X X O X X X X
178 O X O O X X O X 248 O O O X X X X X
179 X X O O X X O X 249 X O O X X X X X
180 O O X O X X O X 250 O X O X X X X X

181 X O X O X X O X
182 O X X O X X O X
183 X X X O X X O X
184 O O O X X X O X O = OPEN / OFF
185 X O O X X X O X
186 O X O X X X O X X = CLOSED / ON
187 X X O X X X O X
188 O O X X X X O X
189 X O X X X X O X
190 O X X X X X O X
15.1 F-2 95-8533
APPENDIX G

Device Model MatricES

CONTROLLER MODEL MATRIX


MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3001 EQP Controller - 246 Nodes
EQ3016 EQP Controller - 16 Nodes
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail
P Panel Mount
TYPE COM Board 1
N None
C ControlNet
TYPE COM Board 2
N None
E Ethernet Port Expansion
S Serial Port Expansion
TYPE APPROVALS*
R VNIIPO/VNIIFTRI (Russia)
S SIL
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx
T-C T plus US Coast Guard
W FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx
W-C W plus US Coast Guard

*Type "APPROVALS" can use one or more letters to designate the approvals of the product.
Some configurations are not available. Check with factory for additional information.

For USCG approved controller models, refer to Appendix D.

NOTE: Contact Customer Service when ordering replacement EQ3XXX Controllers for redundant systems.

15.1 G-1 95-8533


EDIO MODEL MATRIX
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3730 8 Channel Enhanced Discrete Input/Output (EDIO) Module
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D DIN Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS*
R VNIIPO/VNIIFTRI (Russia)
S SIL
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx
W FM/CSA/ATEX*/IECEx

*Type "APPROVALS" can use one or more letters to designate the approvals of the product.
Some configurations are not available. Check with factory for additional information.

DCIO MODEL MATRIX


MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3700 8 Channel Discrete Input/Output (DCIO) Module
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D DIN Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS*
R VNIIPO/VNIIFTRI (Russia)
W FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx

*Type "APPROVALS" can use one or more letters to designate the approvals of the product.
Some configurations are not available. Check with factory for additional information.

15.1 G-2 95-8533


AIM MODEL MATRIX
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3710 8 Channel Analog Input (AIM) Module
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS*
R VNIIPO/VNIIFTRI (Russia)
S SIL
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx
W FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx

*Type "APPROVALS" can use one or more letters to designate the approvals of the product.
Some configurations are not available. Check with factory for additional information.

RELAY MODULE MODEL MATRIX


MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module (RM)
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS*
R VNIIPO/VNIIFTRI (Russia)
W FM/CSA/ATEX/IECEx

*Type "APPROVALS" can use one or more letters to designate the approvals of the product.
Some configurations are not available. Check with factory for additional information.

15.1 G-3 95-8533


95-8533

FlexSonicTM Acoustic X3301 Multispectrum PointWatch Eclipse ® IR FlexVu ® Universal Display Eagle Quantum Premier ®
Leak Detector IR Flame Detector Combustible Gas Detector with GT3000 Toxic Gas Detector Safety System

­Corporate Office Phone: 952.946.6491 All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
6901 West 110th Street Toll-free: 800.765.3473 © 2013 Detector Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved.
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA Fax: 952.829.8750 Det-Tronics manufacturing system is certified to ISO 9001—
www.det-tronics.com det-tronics@det-tronics.com the world’s most recognized quality management standard.

You might also like